BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

281
BSC6900 GSM V900R013C00 Hardware Description Issue 09 Date 2013-05-29 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Transcript of BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Page 1: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

BSC6900 GSMV900R013C00

Hardware Description

Issue 09

Date 2013-05-29

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Page 2: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

Page 3: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

About This Document

OverviewThis document describes the hardware components of the BSC6900. It provides the users witha detailed and comprehensive reference to the BSC6900.

Product VersionThe following table lists the product version related to this document.

Product Name Product Version

BSC6900 V900R013C00

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:

l Installersl Site operators

Organization1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.

2 Physical Structure

The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, and LMT.

3 Cabinet

The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the HuaweiN68E-22 cabinet.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description About This Document

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

Page 4: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

4 Components of the Cabinet

Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box (common power distribution boxor high-power power distribution box), air defence subrack, rear cable trough, subrack,independent fan subrack, rack, GBAM, KVM, LAN switch, and cable tray.

5 Subracks

This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form anindependent unit.

6 Boards

This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.

7 Cables

This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.

8 LEDs on the Boards

This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.

9 DIP Switches on Components

This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

ConventionsSymbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of riskwhich, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if notavoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description About This Document

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

Page 5: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description About This Document

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

Page 6: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description About This Document

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

Page 7: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description..........................................................1

2 Physical Structure..........................................................................................................................8

3 Cabinet...........................................................................................................................................103.1 Appearance of the Cabinet...........................................................................................................................................113.2 Classification of Cabinets.............................................................................................................................................123.3 Components of the Cabinet..........................................................................................................................................133.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet.......................................................................................................................173.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet................................................................................................................................183.5.1 Relationship Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components..............................................................................183.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet..............................................................................223.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR...............................................................................................................283.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR................................................................................................................323.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCR ..............................................................................................................37

4 Components of the Cabinet.......................................................................................................414.1 High-Power Power Distribution Box...........................................................................................................................434.1.1 Front Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box...........................................................................................434.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box............................................................................................444.1.3 Technical Specifications of the High-Power Power Distribution Box......................................................................454.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power Power Distribution Box..........................................................464.2 Common Power Distribution Box................................................................................................................................474.2.1 Front Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box...............................................................................................474.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box................................................................................................494.2.3 Technical Specifications of the Common Power Distribution Box..........................................................................494.2.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box...............................................................504.3 Air Defence Subrack....................................................................................................................................................524.4 Rear Cable Trough........................................................................................................................................................534.5 Cable Tray....................................................................................................................................................................534.6 KVM.............................................................................................................................................................................544.7 LAN Switch..................................................................................................................................................................554.8 GBAM..........................................................................................................................................................................574.8.1 Functions of GBAM..................................................................................................................................................58

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description Contents

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

Page 8: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

4.8.2 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).................................................................................................584.8.3 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)...........................................................................................614.8.4 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)...................................................................................................644.9 Independent Fan Subrack.............................................................................................................................................674.9.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack............................................................................................................674.9.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack........................................................................................68

5 Subracks........................................................................................................................................705.1 Classification of Subracks............................................................................................................................................715.2 Components of the Subrack..........................................................................................................................................715.2.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)............................................................................................................735.3 Slots in the Subrack......................................................................................................................................................765.4 DIP Switch on the Subrack...........................................................................................................................................765.5 Configuration of the Subrack.......................................................................................................................................795.5.1 Configuration of the MPS..........................................................................................................................................795.5.2 Configuration of the EPS...........................................................................................................................................815.5.3 Configuration of the TCS..........................................................................................................................................825.6 Technical Specifications of the Subrack.......................................................................................................................83

6 Boards............................................................................................................................................846.1 DPUa Board..................................................................................................................................................................896.1.1 Functions of the DPUa Board....................................................................................................................................896.1.2 Panel of the DPUa Board...........................................................................................................................................896.1.3 LEDs on the DPUa Board.........................................................................................................................................906.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUa Board............................................................................................................916.2 DPUc Board..................................................................................................................................................................916.2.1 Functions of the DPUc Board....................................................................................................................................926.2.2 Panel of the DPUc Board...........................................................................................................................................926.2.3 LEDs on the DPUc Board.........................................................................................................................................946.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc Board............................................................................................................946.3 DPUd Board.................................................................................................................................................................956.3.1 Functions of the DPUd Board...................................................................................................................................956.3.2 Panel of the DPUd Board..........................................................................................................................................956.3.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board.........................................................................................................................................976.3.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board............................................................................................................976.4 DPUf Board..................................................................................................................................................................986.4.1 Functions of the DPUf Board....................................................................................................................................986.4.2 Panel of the DPUf Board...........................................................................................................................................996.4.3 LEDs on the DPUf Board........................................................................................................................................1016.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf Board...........................................................................................................1016.5 DPUg Board...............................................................................................................................................................1026.5.1 Functions of the DPUg Board.................................................................................................................................1026.5.2 Panel of the DPUg Board........................................................................................................................................1026.5.3 LEDs on the DPUg Board.......................................................................................................................................104

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description Contents

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

Page 9: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUg Board..........................................................................................................1046.6 EIUa Board.................................................................................................................................................................1056.6.1 Functions of the EIUa Board...................................................................................................................................1056.6.2 Panel of the EIUa Board..........................................................................................................................................1056.6.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board.........................................................................................................................................1066.6.4 Ports on the EIUa Board..........................................................................................................................................1076.6.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board............................................................................................................................1086.6.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa Board...........................................................................................................1106.7 FG2a Board.................................................................................................................................................................1116.7.1 Functions of the FG2a Board...................................................................................................................................1116.7.2 Panel of the FG2a Board.........................................................................................................................................1116.7.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board........................................................................................................................................1126.7.4 Ports on the FG2a Board.........................................................................................................................................1136.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board...........................................................................................................1146.8 FG2c Board.................................................................................................................................................................1146.8.1 Functions of the FG2c Board...................................................................................................................................1156.8.2 Panel of the FG2c Board.........................................................................................................................................1156.8.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board........................................................................................................................................1166.8.4 Ports on the FG2c Board.........................................................................................................................................1176.8.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board...........................................................................................................1176.9 FG2d Board................................................................................................................................................................1186.9.1 Functions of the FG2d Board..................................................................................................................................1196.9.2 Panel of the FG2d Board.........................................................................................................................................1196.9.3 LEDs on the FG2d Board........................................................................................................................................1216.9.4 Ports on the FG2d Board.........................................................................................................................................1216.9.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2d Board...........................................................................................................1226.10 GCUa and GCGa Board...........................................................................................................................................1236.10.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board....................................................................................................................1236.10.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board...........................................................................................................................1236.10.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board..........................................................................................................................1246.10.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board...........................................................................................................................1256.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board............................................................................................1266.11 GOUa Board.............................................................................................................................................................1266.11.1 Functions of the GOUa Board...............................................................................................................................1266.11.2 Panel of the GOUa Board......................................................................................................................................1276.11.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board.....................................................................................................................................1276.11.4 Ports on the GOUa Board......................................................................................................................................1286.11.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board.......................................................................................................1286.12 GOUc Board.............................................................................................................................................................1306.12.1 Functions of the GOUc Board...............................................................................................................................1306.12.2 Panel of the GOUc Board......................................................................................................................................1316.12.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board.....................................................................................................................................132

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description Contents

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

Page 10: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.12.4 Ports on the GOUc Board......................................................................................................................................1326.12.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board.......................................................................................................1336.13 GOUd Board.............................................................................................................................................................1346.13.1 Functions of the GOUd Board...............................................................................................................................1356.13.2 Panel of the GOUd Board......................................................................................................................................1356.13.3 LEDs on the GOUd Board.....................................................................................................................................1376.13.4 Ports on the GOUd Board......................................................................................................................................1376.13.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUd Board.......................................................................................................1386.14 MDMC Board...........................................................................................................................................................1396.14.1 Functions of the MDMC Board.............................................................................................................................1396.14.2 Panel of the MDMC Board....................................................................................................................................1406.14.3 LEDs on the MDMC Board...................................................................................................................................1406.14.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board.........................................................................................................................1416.15 OIUa Board...............................................................................................................................................................1426.15.1 Functions of the OIUa Board.................................................................................................................................1426.15.2 Panel of the OIUa Board.......................................................................................................................................1426.15.3 LEDs on the OIUa Board......................................................................................................................................1436.15.4 Ports on the OIUa Board.......................................................................................................................................1446.15.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board.........................................................................................................1446.16 OMUa and OMUb Board.........................................................................................................................................1466.16.1 Functions of the OMUa/OMUb Board..................................................................................................................1466.16.2 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb Board.........................................................................................................................1476.16.3 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board........................................................................................................................1486.16.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb Board.........................................................................................................................1496.16.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb Board..........................................................................................1496.17 OMUc Board............................................................................................................................................................1516.17.1 Functions of the OMUc Board..............................................................................................................................1516.17.2 Panel of the OMUc Board.....................................................................................................................................1526.17.3 LEDs on the OMUc Board....................................................................................................................................1536.17.4 Ports on the OMUc Board.....................................................................................................................................1546.17.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUc Board.......................................................................................................1546.18 PAMU Board............................................................................................................................................................1566.18.1 Functions of the PAMU Board..............................................................................................................................1566.18.2 Panel of the PAMU Board.....................................................................................................................................1566.18.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board....................................................................................................................................1576.18.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board..........................................................................................................................1586.18.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board......................................................................................................1596.19 PEUa Board..............................................................................................................................................................1596.19.1 Functions of the PEUa Board................................................................................................................................1596.19.2 Panel of the PEUa Board.......................................................................................................................................1606.19.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board......................................................................................................................................1606.19.4 Ports on the PEUa Board.......................................................................................................................................161

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description Contents

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

Page 11: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.19.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board.........................................................................................................................1616.19.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board.........................................................................................................1646.20 PFCU Board.............................................................................................................................................................1656.20.1 Functions of the PFCU Board...............................................................................................................................1656.20.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board............................................................................................................................1656.20.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board........................................................................................................1676.21 POUc Board..............................................................................................................................................................1676.21.1 Functions of the POUc Board................................................................................................................................1686.21.2 Panel of the POUc Board.......................................................................................................................................1686.21.3 LEDs on the POUc Board.....................................................................................................................................1706.21.4 Ports on the POUc Board.......................................................................................................................................1706.21.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board........................................................................................................1716.22 SCUa Board..............................................................................................................................................................1736.22.1 Functions of the SCUa Board................................................................................................................................1736.22.2 Panel of the SCUa Board.......................................................................................................................................1746.22.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board......................................................................................................................................1766.22.4 Ports on the SCUa Board.......................................................................................................................................1766.22.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board........................................................................................................1776.23 SCUb Board..............................................................................................................................................................1786.23.1 Functions of the SCUb Board................................................................................................................................1796.23.2 Panel of the SCUb Board.......................................................................................................................................1796.23.3 LEDs on the SCUb Board.....................................................................................................................................1806.23.4 Ports on the SCUb Board.......................................................................................................................................1816.23.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUb Board........................................................................................................1826.24 TNUa Board.............................................................................................................................................................1846.24.1 Functions of the TNUa Board...............................................................................................................................1846.24.2 Panel of the TNUa Board......................................................................................................................................1846.24.3 LEDs on the TNUa Board.....................................................................................................................................1856.24.4 Ports on the TNUa Board......................................................................................................................................1866.24.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board........................................................................................................1866.25 XPUa Board..............................................................................................................................................................1876.25.1 Functions of the XPUa Board................................................................................................................................1876.25.2 Panel of the XPUa Board.......................................................................................................................................1886.25.3 LEDs on the XPUa Board.....................................................................................................................................1896.25.4 Ports on the XPUa Board.......................................................................................................................................1906.25.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board........................................................................................................1906.26 XPUb Board.............................................................................................................................................................1916.26.1 Functions of the XPUb Board...............................................................................................................................1916.26.2 Panel of the XPUb Board......................................................................................................................................1926.26.3 LEDs on the XPUb Board.....................................................................................................................................1936.26.4 Ports on the XPUb Board......................................................................................................................................1946.26.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board........................................................................................................194

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description Contents

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

x

Page 12: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.27 WOPB Board............................................................................................................................................................1956.27.1 Functions of the WOPB Board..............................................................................................................................195

7 Cables...........................................................................................................................................1967.1 Power Cables..............................................................................................................................................................1997.2 PGND Cables.............................................................................................................................................................2027.3 Optical Cable..............................................................................................................................................................2047.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner (Fiber Coupler).................................................................................................................2067.5 75-ohm Coaxial Cable................................................................................................................................................2097.6 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable......................................................................................................................2117.7 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable......................................................................................................................................2147.8 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable............................................................................................................2167.9 Inter-TNUa Cable.......................................................................................................................................................2197.10 BITS Clock Cable.....................................................................................................................................................2217.11 Y-Shaped Clock Cable.............................................................................................................................................2237.12 Line Clock Signal Cable...........................................................................................................................................2247.13 Straight-Through Cable............................................................................................................................................2257.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack.....................................................................................2277.15 Alarm Box Signal Cable...........................................................................................................................................2297.16 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box........................................................................................2307.17 GPS Signal Transmission Cable...............................................................................................................................2327.18 OMU serial cable......................................................................................................................................................2337.19 EMU RS485 Communication Cable........................................................................................................................2337.20 SFP+ High-Speed Cable...........................................................................................................................................234

8 LEDs on the Boards...................................................................................................................2368.1 LEDs on the DPUa Board..........................................................................................................................................2388.2 LEDs on the DPUc Board..........................................................................................................................................2388.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board..........................................................................................................................................2398.4 LEDs on the DPUf Board...........................................................................................................................................2398.5 LEDs on the DPUg Board..........................................................................................................................................2408.6 LEDs on the EIUa Board............................................................................................................................................2418.7 LEDs on the FG2a Board...........................................................................................................................................2418.8 LEDs on the FG2c Board...........................................................................................................................................2428.9 LEDs on the FG2d Board...........................................................................................................................................2438.10 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board.............................................................................................................................2448.11 LEDs on the GOUa Board........................................................................................................................................2448.12 LEDs on the GOUc Board........................................................................................................................................2458.13 LEDs on the GOUd Board........................................................................................................................................2468.14 LEDs on the MDMC Board......................................................................................................................................2478.15 LEDs on the OIUa Board.........................................................................................................................................2478.16 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board...........................................................................................................................2488.17 LEDs on the OMUc Board.......................................................................................................................................2498.18 LEDs on the PAMU Board.......................................................................................................................................249

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description Contents

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

Page 13: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

8.19 LEDs on the PEUa Board.........................................................................................................................................2508.20 LEDs on the POUc Board........................................................................................................................................2518.21 LEDs on the SCUa Board.........................................................................................................................................2518.22 LEDs on the SCUb Board........................................................................................................................................2528.23 LEDs on the TNUa Board........................................................................................................................................2538.24 LEDs on the XPUa Board........................................................................................................................................2548.25 LEDs on the XPUb Board........................................................................................................................................254

9 DIP Switches on Components................................................................................................2569.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack.........................................................................................................................................2579.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board...............................................................................................................................2599.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board..............................................................................................................................2629.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board...............................................................................................................................2629.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board..............................................................................................................................2639.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board.................................................................................................................................266

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description Contents

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xii

Page 14: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM HardwareDescription

This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.

09 (2013-05-29)This is the ninth commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 08 (2013-01-28), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with issue 08 (2013-01-28), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

6.9.5 Technical Specificationsof the FG2d Board6.13.5 Technical Specificationsof the GOUd Board

The maximum packet forwarding rate (UL+DL) is addedin Table 2 Specifications of the board processingcapability.

Compared with issue 08 (2013-01-28), this issue does not exclude any topics.

08 (2013-01-28)This is the eighth commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 07 (2012-09-17), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with issue 07 (2012-09-17), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

3.4 Technical Specifications ofthe Cabinet

The description about heat dissipation is added.

5.5.1 Configuration of the MPS5.5.2 Configuration of the EPS

The description about the A over IP subrack configurationmode is deleted.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1

Page 15: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Content Description

6 Boards The description on the number of the DPUa, DPUc,DPUd, DPUf, DPUg, EIUa, FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa,GOUc, GOUd, NIUa, OIUa, OMUa/OMUb, PEUa,POUc, XPUa, and XPUb boards that can be configuredis optimized.

6.2.1 Functions of the DPUcBoard6.4.1 Functions of the DPUfBoard

The description about the functions of the DPUc/DPUfboard is modified.

Front Panel of the GBAM(IBM X3650T)Rear Panel of the GBAM (IBMX3650T)Front Panel of the GBAM(HUAWEI C5210)Rear Panel of the GBAM(HUAWEI C5210)Front Panel of the GBAM (HPCC3310)Rear Panel of the GBAM (HPCC3310)6.16.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb Board6.17.4 Ports on the OMUcBoard6.22.4 Ports on the SCUa Board6.23.4 Ports on the SCUb Board

The function of the ports is modified.

6.16.5 Technical Specificationsof the OMUa/OMUb Board

The description of hard disk capacity is added.

Compared with issue 07 (2012-09-17), this issue does not exclude any following topics.

07 (2012-09-17)This is the seventh commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 06 (2012-06-25), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with issue 06 (2012-06-25), this issue incorporates the following changes:

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2

Page 16: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Content Description

5.4 DIP Switch on the Subrack l The function description of the last bit of the DIP isadded.

l The description of setting the DIP is added.

6.16.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb Board6.17.4 Ports on the OMUcBoard

The function of COM port is modified.

6.11.5 Technical Specificationsof the GOUa Board6.12.5 Technical Specificationsof the GOUc Board6.13.5 Technical Specificationsof the GOUd Board6.15.5 Technical Specificationsof the OIUa Board6.21.5 Technical Specificationsof the POUc Board6.23.5 Technical Specificationsof the SCUb Board

l The specifications of the optical ports on this boardare updated.

l The receiver sensitivity names are unified.l Saturation optical power is added.

Compared with issue 06 (2012-06-25), this issue excludes the following topics:

l Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)

06 (2012-06-25)This is the sixth commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

6.10.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board6.22.4 Ports on the SCUa Board6.23.4 Ports on the SCUb Board

The function of COM port is modified.

6.16.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb Board6.17.4 Ports on the OMUcBoard

The function of USB and COM port are modified.

6.16.5 Technical Specificationsof the OMUa/OMUb Board

Hard disk capacity is modified to 73 GB or above x 2(RAID 1).

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3

Page 17: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05), this issue does not exclude any topics.

05 (2012-01-05)

This is the fifth commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 04 (2011-08-31), this issue includes the following new topics:

l 6.9 FG2d Board

– 6.9.1 Functions of the FG2d Board

– 6.9.2 Panel of the FG2d Board

– 6.9.3 LEDs on the FG2d Board

– 6.9.4 Ports on the FG2d Board

– 6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2d Boardl 6.13 GOUd Board

– 6.13.1 Functions of the GOUd Board

– 6.13.2 Panel of the GOUd Board

– 6.13.3 LEDs on the GOUd Board

– 6.13.4 Ports on the GOUd Board

– 6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUd Board

Compared with issue 04 (2011-08-31), this issue does not incorporate any changes.

Compared with issue 04 (2011-08-31), this issue does not exclude any topics.

04 (2011-08-31)

This is the fourth commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 03 (2011-05-30), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with issue 03 (2011-05-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

3.4 Technical Specifications ofthe Cabinet

The following specifications are added: powerconsumption and heat dissipation.

6 Boards l The description of board replacement is added.l The information about interfaces sharing an interface

board is added.l Specifications about bandwidth provided by the

backplane for each board are added.

6.22.5 Technical Specificationsof the SCUa Board

Specifications about switching bandwidth of each slotwhen the subrack is configured with two SCUa boards areadded.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4

Page 18: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Content Description

6.23.5 Technical Specificationsof the SCUb Board

Specifications about switching bandwidth of each slotwhen the subrack is configured with two SCUb boardsare added.

6.24.5 Technical Specificationsof the TNUa Board

The specification about board processing capability isadded.

6.21.4 Ports on the POUc Board The description of optical port multiplexing E1/T1 portnumber is added.

6.15.4 Ports on the OIUa Board The description of optical port multiplexing E1/T1 portnumber is added.

6.11.5 Technical Specificationsof the GOUa Board

The specification unit when the GOUa board functions asan A interface is changed from CIC to Erlang.

6.12.5 Technical Specificationsof the GOUc Board

The specification unit when the GOUc board functions asan A interface is changed from CIC to Erlang.

6.21.5 Technical Specificationsof the POUc Board

The specification unit when the POUc board functions asan A interface is changed from CIC to Erlang.

6.7.5 Technical Specificationsof the FG2a Board

The specification unit when the FG2a board functions asan A interface is changed from CIC to Erlang.

6.8.5 Technical Specificationsof the FG2c Board

The specification unit when the FG2c board functions asan A interface is changed from CIC to Erlang.

6.16 OMUa and OMUb Board The board slot is modified.

Compared with issue 03 (2011-05-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

03 (2011-05-30)This is the third commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-25), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-25), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

5.6 Technical Specifications ofthe Subrack

The specification of power consumption is modified.

Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-25), this issue does not exclude any topics.

02 (2011-04-25)This is the second commercial release of V900R013C00.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5

Page 19: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue includes the following new topics:

l 7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner (Fiber Coupler)

Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

6.23.5 Technical Specificationsof the SCUb Board

The specification of power consumption and weight aremodified.

6.4.4 Technical Specificationsof the DPUf Board

The specification of power consumption and weight aremodified.

6.5.4 Technical Specificationsof the DPUg Board

The specification of power consumption is modified.

Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

01 (2011-03-30)This is the first commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not incorporate any changes.

Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft A (2011-01-31)This is the Draft A release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20) of V900R012C01, this issue includes the following newtopics:

l 6.4 DPUf Boardl 6.5 DPUg Boardl 6.17 OMUc Boardl 6.23 SCUb Boardl 7.20 SFP+ High-Speed Cable

Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20) of V900R012C01, this issue incorporates the followingchanges:

Content Description

4.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box

The figure of the rear panel of the high-power powerdistribution box is modified.

4.2.2 Rear Panel of theCommon Power DistributionBox

The figure of the rear panel of the common powerdistribution box is modified.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6

Page 20: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Content Description

7.19 EMU RS485Communication Cable

The installation of EMU RS485 communication cable ismodified.

6.19.6 Technical Specificationsof the PEUa Board

The A-interface processing specification of the board isadded: CIC (64K).

Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20) of V900R012C01, this issue does not exclude any topics.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7

Page 21: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

2 Physical Structure

The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, and LMT.

Figure 2-1 shows the BSC6900 physical structure.

Figure 2-1 BSC6900 physical structure

(1) GPS: Global Positioning System (2) PDF: Power Distribution Frame (DC)

(3) LMT: Local Maintenance Terminal

Table 2-1 describes the components of the BSC6900.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 2 Physical Structure

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8

Page 22: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 2-1 Components of the BSC6900

Component Description

Cabinet For details, see 3 Cabinet.

Cables For details, see 7 Cables.

GPS antenna system The GPS antenna system consists of the antenna, feeder, jumper,and surge protector.The GPS antenna system is used to receive GPS satellite signals. Itis optional.

LMT The LMT refers to the operation and maintenance (OM) terminalthat is installed with the Huawei Local Maintenance Terminalsoftware and is connected to the OM network of the BSC6900. TheLMT is used to operate and maintain the BSC6900.For details, see the BSC6900 GSM LMT User Guide.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 2 Physical Structure

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9

Page 23: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

3 Cabinet

About This Chapter

The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the HuaweiN68E-22 cabinet.

3.1 Appearance of the CabinetThe N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-doorcabinet.

3.2 Classification of CabinetsBased on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR), extendedprocessing rack (EPR), and transcoder rack (TCR).

3.3 Components of the CabinetWhen the MPR is configured with the GBAM, the components of the MPR are different fromthose of the EPR/TCR. When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the components ofthe MPR are the same as those of the EPR/TCR.

3.4 Technical Specifications of the CabinetThe technical specifications of the cabinet consist of cabinet dimensions, height of the availablespace, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, Electromagnetic Compatibility(EMC), power consumption, and heat dissipation.

3.5 Cable Connections of the CabinetThis section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables inthe cabinet.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

Page 24: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

3.1 Appearance of the CabinetThe N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-doorcabinet.

Figure 3-1 shows the single-door cabinet. Figure 3-2 shows the double-door cabinet.

Figure 3-1 Single-door cabinet

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

Page 25: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-2 Double-door cabinet

3.2 Classification of CabinetsBased on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR), extendedprocessing rack (EPR), and transcoder rack (TCR).

MPR

Only one MPR is configured in the BSC6900.

EPR

The number of EPRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume, but only one EPR can beconfigured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not to configure the EPR.

TCR

The number of TCRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume and the configuration modesof subracks. Up to two TCRs can be configured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not toconfigure a TCR.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

Page 26: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

For details on the components of the MPR, the EPR, or the TCR, see 3.3 Components of theCabinet.

3.3 Components of the CabinetWhen the MPR is configured with the GBAM, the components of the MPR are different fromthose of the EPR/TCR. When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the components ofthe MPR are the same as those of the EPR/TCR.

Components of the MPR (Configured with the OMU)/EPR/TCRWhen the MPR cabinet is configured with the OMU board, the components of the MPR are thesame as those of the EPR/TCR. The components are the power distribution box, subrack, airdefence subrack, independent fan subrack, cable rack, rack, and rear cable trough. Figure 3-3shows the components of the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

Page 27: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-3 Components of the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR

(1) Air inlet (2) Independent fan subrack (3) Subrack

(4) Air defence subrack (5) Filler panel (6) Power distribution box

(7) Cable rack (8) Rear cable trough (9) Cable rack

Table 3-1 lists the components of the cabinet and describes their configurations.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

Page 28: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 3-1 Components of the cabinet and their configurations

Component Configuration

4.1 High-Power PowerDistribution Box or 4.2Common Power DistributionBox

One common power distribution box or one high-powerpower distribution box is configured.

Subrack l The MPR is configured with one main processingsubrack (MPS). In addition, depending on the trafficvolume, it is configured with zero to two extendedprocessing subracks (EPSs) or transcoder subracks(TCSs).

l The EPR is configured with one to three EPSs,depending on the traffic volume.

l The TCR is configured with one to three TCSs,depending on the traffic volume.

Air Defence Subrack Two air defence subracks are configured.

Independent Fan Subrack Only one independent fan subrack is configured.

Rear Cable Trough Three rear cable troughs are configured.

Cable Tray If a BSC6900 is configured with two cabinets and thecabling distance between the two cabinets is longer than 10m, a cable tray is configured for each cabinet. Optical fibersgo through the cable tray installed at the bottom of a cabinet.

NOTEThe subracks are numbered from bottom to top, and the MPS is numbered 0.

Components of the MPR (Configured with the GBAM)When the MPR is configured with the GBAM, its components are the power distribution box,subrack, air defence subrack, KVM, LAN switch, cable tray, GBAM, and rear cable trough.Figure 3-4 shows the components of the MPR (configured with the GBAM).

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

Page 29: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-4 Components of the MPR (configured with the GBAM)

(1) GBAM (2) Filler panel (3) Cable tray (4) LAN switch (5) KVM(6) Subrack (7) Air defence subrack (8) Power distribution box (9) Cable rack (10) Rear cable trough

Table 3-2 lists the components of the MPR and describes their configurations.

Table 3-2 Components of the MPR and their configurations

Component Configuration

4.2 Common Power Distribution Box Only one common power distribution boxis configured.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

Page 30: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Component Configuration

Subrack The MPR is configured with one MPS. Inaddition, depending on the traffic volume,it is configured with zero to two EPSs orTCSs.

Air Defence Subrack Two air defence subracks are configured.

KVM The KVM is optional. The MPR can beconfigured with one KVM.

LAN switch One LAN switch is configured.

Cable Tray One is configured.

GBAM One GBAM is configured.

Rear Cable Trough Three rear cable troughs are configured.

NOTE

The MPR can use the common power distribution box but not the high-power distribution box when it isconfigured with the GBAM.

3.4 Technical Specifications of the CabinetThe technical specifications of the cabinet consist of cabinet dimensions, height of the availablespace, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, Electromagnetic Compatibility(EMC), power consumption, and heat dissipation.

Technical Specifications of the BSC6900 Cabinet (N68E-22)The BSC6900 uses the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet.

Table 3-3 describes the technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22).

Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22)

Item Specification

Dimensions (H x W x D) 2200 mm x 600 mm x 800 mm

Height of the available space 46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight l Empty cabinet ≤ 100 kgl Cabinet in full configuration ≤ 320 kg

Rated input voltage -48 V DC power supply

Input voltage range -40 V to -57 V

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

Page 31: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

EMC l Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386l Meets the requirements in Council directive 89/336/

EEC

Power consumption The cabinet power consumption equals the sum of powerconsumption of all subracks in the cabinet.It is recommended that the power distribution systemprovide a maximum of 5100 W power per cabinet tofacilitate capacity expansion.

Heat consumption The heat generated by a cabinet equals the total heatgenerated by all subracks in the cabinet.To facilitate capacity expansion in future, the airconditioning system installed onsite must be able todissipate a maximum of 4100 W heat from each cabinet.

Heat dissipation A fan and air defense frames are installed in a BSC cabinet.Air flows in from the bottom of the cabinet and flows outfrom the top of the cabinet, ensuring good heat dissipation.

WARNINGWhen the voltage of power supply is lower than the lower threshold of the input voltage scope,multiple boards will become abnormal at the same time.Therefore, check the power system if multiple boards are abnormal at the same time.

3.5 Cable Connections of the CabinetThis section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables inthe cabinet.

3.5.1 Relationship Between Power Outputs and CabinetComponents

This section describes the fixed relationship between the outputs of the PDF and the inputs ofpower distribution box as well as between the outputs of power distribution box and thecomponents in the cabinet.

Cabinet Configured with High-Power Power Distribution Box

For details on the working mechanism of the power system, see the Power Supply Principle.

Figure 3-5 shows the relationship between power outputs and the components in the MPR thatis configured with a high-power power distribution box. Table 3-4 describes the relationship

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

Page 32: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

between power outputs and the components in the MPR that is configured with a high-powerpower distribution box.

Figure 3-5 Relationship between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-powerpower distribution box)

Table 3-4 Relationship between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power powerdistribution box)

PDF Output Input of PowerDistribution Box

Outputof PowerDistribution Box

Subrack Input

63 A -48 V DCoutput 1

A1(-) A7 NEG(-)

-48 V DC input 2 on theindependent fan subrack

A8 NEG(-)

-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2

63 A -48 V DCoutput 2

B1(-) B7 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 1 on theindependent fan subrack

B8 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2

63 A RTN poweroutput 1

A1(+) A7 RTN(+)

RTN power input 2 on theindependent fan subrack

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

Page 33: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

PDF Output Input of PowerDistribution Box

Outputof PowerDistribution Box

Subrack Input

A8 RTN(+)

RTN power input 2 on subrack2

63 A RTN poweroutput 2

B1(+) B7 RTN(+)

RTN power input 1 on theindependent fan subrack

B8 RTN(+)

RTN power input 1 on subrack2

100 A -48 V DCoutput 1

A3(-) A9 NEG(-)

-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1

A10 NEG(-)

-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0

100 A -48 V DCoutput 2

B3(-) B9 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1

B10 NEG(-)

-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0

100 A RTN poweroutput 1

A3(+) A9 RTN(+)

RTN power input 2 on subrack1

A10 RTN(+)

RTN power input 2 on subrack0

100 A RTN poweroutput 2

B3(+) B9 RTN(+)

RTN power input 1 on subrack1

B10 RTN(+)

RTN power input 1 on subrack0

Cabinet Configured with Common Power Distribution BoxFigure 3-6 shows the relationship between power outputs and the components in the MPR thatis configured with a common power distribution box. Table 3-5 describes the relationshipbetween power outputs and the components in the MPR that is configured with a common powerdistribution box.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

Page 34: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-6 Relationship between power outputs and cabinet components (with common powerdistribution box)

Table 3-5 Relationship between power outputs and cabinet components (with common powerdistribution box)

PDF Output Input of PowerDistribution Box

Outputof PowerDistribution Box

Subrack Input

100 A -48 V DCoutput 1

-48V1 I -48V1 -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2

II -48V1 -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1

III -48V1 -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0

100 A -48 V DCoutput 2

-48V2 I -48V2 -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2

II -48V2 -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1

III -48V2 -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0

100 A RTN poweroutput 1

RTN RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack2

RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack1

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

Page 35: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

PDF Output Input of PowerDistribution Box

Outputof PowerDistribution Box

Subrack Input

RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack0

100 A RTN poweroutput 2

RTN RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack2

RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack1

RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack0

3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the CabinetThe power cables in the cabinet are used to connect the power distribution box to the subrackand independent fan subrack, thereby ensuring a stable power supply to the subrack andindependent fan subrack. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the ground bar inthe equipment room, thereby protecting the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.

Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the MPR (Configured with theOMU Board)/EPR/TCR

When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the connections of power cables and PGNDcables in the MPR are the same as the connections of power cables and PGND cables in theEPR/TCR. Figure 3-7 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR(configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR that is configured with the high-power powerdistribution box.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

Page 36: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the cabinet (configured with thehigh-power power distribution box)

Table 3-6 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

Page 37: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet

SN Description

5, 6, 11, 12 Power cables for the bottom subrack

3, 4, 9, 10 Power cables for the middle subrack

1, 2, 7, 8 Power cables for the top subrack

13 PGND cable connecting the power distribution box andthe mounting bar

14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 PGND cables connecting the subracks and the mountingbar

24, 25, 26 Inter-cabinet PGND cables

27, 28, 29, 30 Power cables for the independent fan subrack

31 PGND cable connecting the independent fan subrack andthe mounting bar

50-57 PGND cables for cabinet doors and side panels

Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the MPR (Configured with theGBAM)

Figure 3-8 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that isconfigured with GBAM IBM X3650T. Figure 3-9 shows the connections of power cables andPGND cables in the MPR that is configured with GBAM HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

Page 38: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBMX3650T)

Table 3-7 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that isconfigured with IBM X3650T.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

Page 39: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBMX3650T)

SN Description

1-8 Power cables for subracks

9, 10 Power cables for the LAN switch

11 Power cable for the KVM

12 Monitoring signal cable for the powerdistribution box

11.1.1, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.2.2 Power cables for the GBAM

13 PGND cable connecting the powerdistribution box and the busbar

14, 15, 16, 17 PGND cables for subracks

18, 19 PGND cables connecting the busbars ofdifferent cabinets

20 PGND cable for the KVM

21 PGND cable for the LAN switch

22, 23 PGND cables for the GBAM

24-31 PGND cables for cabinet doors and sidepanels

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

Page 40: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-9 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured withHUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310)

Table 3-8 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that isconfigured with HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

Page 41: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured withHUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310)

SN Description

1-8 Power cables for subracks

11 Power cable for the KVM

12 Monitoring signal cable for the powerdistribution box

11.1.1, 11.2.1 Power cables for the LAN switch

9.1, 9.2, 10.1, 10.2, 11.1.2, 11.2.2, 11.1.3,11.2.3

Power cables for the GBAM

13 PGND cable connecting the powerdistribution box and the busbar

14, 15, 16, 17 PGND cables for subracks

18, 19 PGND cables connecting the busbars ofdifferent cabinets

20 PGND cable for the KVM

21 PGND cable for the LAN switch

22, 23 PGND cables for the GBAM

24-31 PGND cables for cabinet doors and sidepanels

3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPRThe signal cables for the MPR are the 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-ohm twistedpair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, SFP+ high-speed cable, inter-TNUa cable, BITSclock signal cable, Y-shaped clock signal cable, and monitoring signal cable for the powerdistribution box.

For details about different types of signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-10 shows theconnections of signal cables for the MPR that is configured with one MPS subrack and two EPSsubracks.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

Page 42: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-10 Connections of signal cables for the MPR

NOTE

l The types and quantity of interface boards shown in Figure 3-10 are taken as examples. The actualconfigurations depend on the site planning.

l The quantity and installation positions of Ethernet cables, optical cables, and trunk cables shown inFigure 3-10 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

Table 3-9 describes the connections of signal cables for the MPR.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

Page 43: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 3-9 Connections of signal cables for the MPR

SN Description Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 1

Connector Type2/ConnectionPosition 2

Remarks

1, 2, 3,and 4

75-ohm coaxialcable or 120-ohmtwisted pair cableconnecting theGCUa board to theBITS clock

SMB maleconnector/CLKIN1port on the GCUaboard in slot 13 ofthe MPS

Connector of theBITS clock/BITSclock port

Figure 3-10shows theclock cablesconnected tothe CLKIN1and CLKIN0ports. Inpractice, onlyone port isconnected tothe BITSclock source.

75-ohm coaxialcable or 120-ohmtwisted pair cableconnecting theGCUa board to theBITS clock

SMB maleconnector/CLKIN0port on the GCUaboard in slot 13 ofthe MPS

Connector of theBITS clock/BITSclock port

75-ohm coaxialcable or 120-ohmtwisted pair cableconnecting theGCUa board to theBITS clock

SMB maleconnector/CLKIN1port on the GCUaboard in slot 12 ofthe MPS

Connector of theBITS clock/BITSclock port

75-ohm coaxialcable or 120-ohmtwisted pair cableconnecting theGCUa board to theBITS clock

SMB maleconnector/CLKIN0port on the GCUaboard in slot 12 ofthe MPS

Connector of theBITS clock/BITSclock port

5 Y-shaped clocksignal cableconnecting theGCUa board to theSCUb board

RJ45/CLKOUT0port on the GCUaboard in slot 12 or13 of the MPS

RJ45/CLKIN porton the SCUb boardin slot 7 of the EPS

-

6 Y-shaped clocksignal cableconnecting theGCUa board to theSCUb board

RJ45/CLKOUT0port on the GCUaboard in slot 12 or13 of the MPS

RJ45/CLKIN porton the SCUb boardin slot 6 of the EPS

7 Cable connectingTNUa boards indifferent subracks

DB14/TDM port onthe TNUa board inslot 4 or 5 of theMPS

DB14/TDM porton the TNUa boardin slot 4 or 5 of theEPS

-

8 Cable connectingTNUa boards indifferent subracks

DB14/TDM port onthe TNUa board inslot 4 or 5 of theMPS

DB14/TDM porton the TNUa boardin slot 4 or 5 of theEPS

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

Page 44: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

SN Description Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 1

Connector Type2/ConnectionPosition 2

Remarks

9 and 10 E1/T1 cable for theEIUa board

DB44/E1/T1 porton the EIUa boardin slot 14 or 15 ofthe MPS

DDF or other NEs -

11 E1/T1 cable for theEIUa board

DB44/E1/T1 porton the EIUa boardin slot 14 or 15 ofthe EPS

DDF or other NEs -

12 Monitoring signalcable for the powerdistribution box

DB15/Port on therear panel of thepower distributionbox

DB9/MONITOR 1port on theindependent fansubrack

-

13 Optical cablebetween the MPSand the TCS

LC connector/Slot27 of the MPS

OIUa board in theTCS, ODF, or otherNEs

-

14 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferent subracks

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 7 of the MPS

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 6 of the EPS

-

15 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferent subracks

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 7 of the MPS

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 7 of the EPS

16 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferent subracks

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 6 of the MPS

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 7 of the EPS

17 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferent subracks

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 6 of the MPS

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 6 of the EPS

18 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferent subracks

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 7 of the MPS

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 6 of the EPS

19 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferent subracks

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 6 of the MPS

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 6 of the EPS

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

Page 45: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

SN Description Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 1

Connector Type2/ConnectionPosition 2

Remarks

20 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferent subracks

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 7 of the MPS

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 7 of the EPS

21 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferent subracks

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 6 of the MPS

RJ45/10G port onthe SCUb board inslot 7 of the EPS

22 Ethernet cablebetween the OMUcboard and theM2000 or LAN

RJ45/Ethernet porton the OMUc board

RJ45/Ethernet porton the M2000 or ofthe LAN

The Ethernetport on theOMUc boardis connectedto theEthernet porton the M2000or of theLAN.

23 Monitoring signalcable for theindependent fansubrack

DB15/MONITOR0 port on theindependent fansubrack

DB9/MONITORport on the rear ofthe subrack at thebottom

Onemonitoringsignal cablefor theindependentfan subrack ismandatoryand isinstalledbeforedelivery.

NOTE

The SFP+ high-speed cable has two length specifications: 3 m (9.84 ft.) and 10 m (32.80 ft.). The SCUb boardsinside the same cabinet are connected using the SFP+ high-speed cable. When the cabling distance between twosubracks in different cabinets is longer than 10 m (32.80 ft.), the SCUb boards in the two subracks need to beconnected using a multi-mode optical cable.

3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPRThe signal cables for the EPR are the 75-ohm coaxial cable, 120-ohm twisted pair cable, opticalcable, straight-through cable, SFP+ high-speed cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clock signalcable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

For details about different types of signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-11 shows theconnections of signal cables for the EPR that is configured with three EPS subracks.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

Page 46: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-11 Connections of signal cables for the EPR

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

Page 47: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

NOTE

l The types and quantity of interface boards shown in Figure 3-11 are taken as examples. The actualconfigurations depend on the site planning.

l The quantity and installation positions of Ethernet cables, optical cables, and trunk cables shown inFigure 3-11 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

Table 3-10 describes the connections of signal cables for the EPR.

Table 3-10 Connections of signal cables for the EPR

SN Description Connector Type 1/Connection Position 1

Connector Type 2/Connection Position 2

1 l SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

l Multi-modeoptical cableconnectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUbboard in slot 6 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on theSCUb board in slot 6 of theMPS

2 l SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

l Multi-modeoptical cableconnectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUbboard in slot 6 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on theSCUb board in slot 6 of theMPS

3 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferent subracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUbboard in slot 7 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on theSCUb board in slot 7 of theMPS

4 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferent subracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUbboard in slot 6 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on theSCUb board in slot 6 of theMPS

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

Page 48: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

SN Description Connector Type 1/Connection Position 1

Connector Type 2/Connection Position 2

5 l SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

l Multi-modeoptical cableconnectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUbboard in slot 7 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on theSCUb board in slot 6 of theMPS

6 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferent subracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUbboard in slot 6 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on theSCUb board in slot 7 of theMPS

7 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferent subracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUbboard in slot 7 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on theSCUb board in slot 6 of theMPS

8 l SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

l Multi-modeoptical cableconnectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUbboard in slot 6 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on theSCUb board in slot 7 of theMPS

9 l SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

l Multi-modeoptical cableconnectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUbboard in slot 7 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on theSCUb board in slot 7 of theMPS

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

Page 49: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

SN Description Connector Type 1/Connection Position 1

Connector Type 2/Connection Position 2

10 l SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

l Multi-modeoptical cableconnectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUbboard in slot 6 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on theSCUb board in slot 7 of theMPS

11 l SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

l Multi-modeoptical cableconnectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUbboard in slot 7 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on theSCUb board in slot 7 of theMPS

12 l SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

l Multi-modeoptical cableconnectingSCUb boards indifferentsubracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUbboard in slot 7 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on theSCUb board in slot 6 of theMPS

13, 14,and 15

E1/T1 cable for theEIUa board

DB44/E1/T1 port on theEIUa board in slot 14 or 15of the EPS

DDF or other NEs

16, 17,and 18

Cable connectingTNUa boards indifferent subracks

DB14/TDM port on theTNUa board in slot 4 or 5 ofthe EPS

DB14/TDM port on theTNUa board in slot 4 or 5of the EPS

19 Monitoring signalcable for the powerdistribution box

DB15/Port on the rear panelof the power distributionbox

DB9/MONITOR 1 port onthe independent fansubrack

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

Page 50: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

SN Description Connector Type 1/Connection Position 1

Connector Type 2/Connection Position 2

20 Monitoring signalcable for theindependent fansubrack

DB15/MONITOR 0 port onthe independent fan subrack

DB9/MONITOR port onthe rear of the subrack atthe bottom

NOTE

The SFP+ high-speed cable has two length specifications: 3 m (9.84 ft.) and 10 m (32.80 ft.). The SCUb boardsinside the same cabinet are connected using the SFP+ high-speed cable. When the cabling distance between twosubracks in different cabinets is longer than 10 m (32.80 ft.), the SCUb boards in the two subracks need to beconnected using a multi-mode optical cable.

3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCRThe signal cables for the TCR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, SFP+ high-speed cable, inter-TNUacable, Y-shaped clock cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

For details on signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-12 shows the connections of the signal cablesfor the TCR.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

Page 51: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 3-12 Connections of signal cables for the TCR

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

Page 52: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

NOTE

l The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure3-12 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

l Among the multiple TCSs configured in the BSC6900 cabinet, one TCS is responsible for forwardingthe OM signals from other TCSs, and this TCS is referred to as the main TCS. In Figure 3-12, thelowest TCS serves as the main subrack. In practice, any TCS can serve as the main subrack, and theSCUb board in the main TCS is connected to the SCUb boards in other TCSs in star topology.

Table 3-11 describes the connections of signal cables for the TCR.

Table 3-11 Explanation of connections of signal cables for the TCR

SN Description Connector Type1/Connection Position1

Connector Type2/Connection Position2

1 Monitoring signalcable for the powerdistribution box

DB15/Port connecting thepower distribution box tothe independent fan subrack

DB9/MONITOR 1 port onthe independent fansubrack

2 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards ofdifferent subracks

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 6 of themain TCS

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 6 of theTCS

3 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards ofdifferent subracks

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 6 of themain TCS

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 7 of theTCS

4 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards ofdifferent subracks

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 6 of themain TCS

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 6 of theTCS

5 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards ofdifferent subracks

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 6 of themain TCS

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 7 of theTCS

6 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards ofdifferent subracks

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 7 of themain TCS

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 6 of theTCS

7 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards ofdifferent subracks

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 7 of themain TCS

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 7 of theTCS

8 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards ofdifferent subracks

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 7 of themain TCS

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 6 of theTCS

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

Page 53: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

SN Description Connector Type1/Connection Position1

Connector Type2/Connection Position2

9 SFP+ high-speedcable connectingSCUb boards ofdifferent subracks

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 7 of themain TCS

RJ45/The 10G port on theSCUb board in slot 7 of theTCS

10, 11,12

Cable connectingTNUa boards ofdifferent subracks

DB14/TDM ports on theTNUa boards in slots 4 and5 of the TCS

DB14/TDM ports on theTNUa boards in slots 4 and5 of the TCS

13, 14,15

E1/T1 cable for theEIUa board

DB44/E1/T1 port on theEIUa board in slot 14 or 15of the TCS

DDF or other NEs

16 Optical cablebetween differentsubracks

LC optical port/The RX/TXport on the OIUa board inslot 27 of the TCS

OIUa board of the MPS/EPS or ODF

17 Monitoring signalcable for theindependent fansubrack

DB15/MONITOR 0 port onthe independent fan subrack

DB9/Monitor port on therear of the bottom subrack

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

Page 54: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

4 Components of the Cabinet

About This Chapter

Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box (common power distribution boxor high-power power distribution box), air defence subrack, rear cable trough, subrack,independent fan subrack, rack, GBAM, KVM, LAN switch, and cable tray.

4.1 High-Power Power Distribution BoxA high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside eachcabinet at the top.

4.2 Common Power Distribution BoxA high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside eachcabinet at the top.

4.3 Air Defence SubrackThe air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-throughair channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.

4.4 Rear Cable TroughThe rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cabletrough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.

4.5 Cable TrayThe cable tray provides space for the routing of the Ethernet cables for the LAN switch.

4.6 KVMKVM is an abbreviation for Keyboard, Video, and Mouse. It is the operation platform of theGBAM. The KVM is optional. It is installed in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.

4.7 LAN SwitchThe LAN switch is configured in the MPR.

4.8 GBAMThe BSC6900 uses three models of GBAM: IBM X3650T, HUAWEI C5210, and HP CC3310.The GBAM is installed in the MPR.

4.9 Independent Fan Subrack

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

Page 55: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Besides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fansubrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

Page 56: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

4.1 High-Power Power Distribution BoxA high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside eachcabinet at the top.

The high-power power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protectionfor the four -48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the components in the cabinet.Each group has four -48 V outputs and four RTN outputs. The high-power power distributionbox also detects the status of input voltage and the output power, and generates audible andvisual alarms when faults occur.

4.1.1 Front Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution BoxThe components on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box are the panel ofthe Power Allocation Monitoring Unit (PAMU) and the power switches.

Figure 4-1 shows the front panel of the high-power power distribution box.

Figure 4-1 Front panel of the high-power power distribution box

(1) Panel of the PAMU board (2) RUN LED (3) ALM LED(4) Mute switch (5) Power switches (6) Labels for power switches

NOTE

l For details about the PAMU board, see 6.18 PAMU Board.

l When the power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time,indicating that the PAMU board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, theRUN and ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of thepower distribution box.

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.

l If you set the mute switch to I, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm whenit is faulty.

l If you set the mute switch to O, the power distribution box does not generate any audiblealarm when it is faulty.

The front panel of the high-power power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

Page 57: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 4-1 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box.

Table 4-1 LEDs on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The PAMU board is functional andcommunicates with the SCUa/SCUbboard properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFFfor 0.25s

The PAMU board is not working or itdoes not communicate with the SCUa/SCUb board properly.

OFF There is no power supply to the PAMUboard or the power distribution boxdoes not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm related to the powerdistribution box.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.During the self-check of the PAMUboard, however, the ALM LED is alsoON. This indicates that the ALM LEDis functional.

4.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution BoxThe components on the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box are the power inputterminal block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box toa subrack, and a 2-hole ground screw.

Figure 4-2 shows the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box.

Figure 4-2 Rear panel of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)

(1) Power input terminal block (2) Power output terminalblock

(3) Port used to connect the powerdistribution box to a subrack

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

Page 58: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

(4) 2-hole ground screw (5) J1 port (6) J2 port (port used to connect the powerdistribution box to a EMU)

NOTE

l Figure 4-2 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box.

l On the power input terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cableare labeled 3(-) and 1(-) respectively, and the wiring terminals for the RTN power cable are labeled 3(+) and 1(+) respectively.

l On the power output terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cableand RTN power cable are labeled NEG(-) and RTN(+), respectively.

4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the High-Power PowerDistribution Box

This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of thehigh-power power distribution box.

Table 4-2 describes the technical specifications of the high-power power distribution box.

Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)

Item Specification

Power consumption 30 W

Input Rated input voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -72 V DC

Input mode Two groups of power inputs: A and B. Group Aconsists of the power inputs A1+A2 and A3. GroupB consists of the power inputs B1+B2 and B3. Eachgroup has one or two -48 V DC or -60 V DC powerinputs.

Max. input current The maximum rated input current of each route is100 A.

Output Rated output voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC

Output voltagerange

-40 V DC to -72 V DC

Output mode andcurrent

Two groups of power outputs: A and B. Each grouphas one to four -48 V DC or -60 V DC poweroutputs. The maximum rated output current of eachoutput is 50 A and that of each group is 100 A.Each output is controlled by MCBs: A7 to A10 andB7 to B10. These MCBs provide the power surgeprotection function.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

Page 59: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Output protectionspecifications

The power surge protection point is 70 A. You needto manually switch on the corresponding MCBafter the power surge protection.

Rated output power 9,600 W (Two groups of power outputs: A and B.Each group has two -48 V DC power outputs.)

NOTEFor group A, power inputs A1+A2 correspond to power outputs A1 to A8, and power input A3 correspondsto power outputs A9 and A10. Similarly, for group B, power inputs B1+B2 correspond to power outputsB1 to B8, and power input B3 corresponds to power outputs B9 and B10.

4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power PowerDistribution Box

The high-power power distribution box of the cabinet has 20 (10 x 2) power outputs. There is afixed relationship between the eight outputs of the power distribution box and the componentsof the cabinet.

Figure 4-3 shows the relationship between the eight power switches on the power distributionbox and the components in the MPR. Table 4-3 describes the relationship between the eightpower switches on the power distribution box and the components in the MPR.

Figure 4-3 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

Page 60: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 4-3 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR

Component Power Switch

Subrack 2 A8, B8

Subrack 1 A9, B9

Subrack 0 A10, B10

Independent fan subrack A7, B7

4.2 Common Power Distribution BoxA high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside eachcabinet at the top.

The common power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protectionfor the two -48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the components in the cabinet.Each group has three -48 V outputs and three RTN outputs. The common power distributionbox also detects the status of input voltage and the output power, and generates audible andvisual alarms when faults occur.

4.2.1 Front Panel of the Common Power Distribution BoxThe components on the front panel of the common power distribution box are the panel of theDistribution Monitor and Communication board (MDMC), labels for power switches, powerswitches, and the panel of the Overvoltage Protection Board (WOPB).

Figure 4-4 shows the front panel of the common power distribution box.

Figure 4-4 Front panel of the common power distribution box

(1) Panel of the MDMC board (2) RUN LED (3) ALM LED (4) Mute switch(5) Labels for power switches (6) Power switches (7) Panel of the WOPB board

NOTE

For details about the MDMC and WOPB boards, see 6.14 MDMC Board and 6.27 WOPB Board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

Page 61: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

CAUTIONl Before operating a power switch, refer to the label for the power switch on the panel of the

common power distribution box.l Before removing a component from the cabinet, one must turn off the power switch that

controls power supply to the component and remove the power cable for the component.

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.

l If you set the mute switch to ON, the common power distribution box generates an audiblealarm when it is faulty.

l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the common power distribution box does not generatean audible alarm when it is faulty.

The front panel of the common power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM.

Table 4-4 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the common power distribution box.

Table 4-4 LEDs on the front panel of the common power distribution box

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The MDMC board is functional andcommunicates with the SCUa/SCUbboard properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFFfor 0.25s

The MDMC is not working or it does notcommunicate with the SCUa/SCUbboard properly.

OFF There is no power supply to the MDMCboard or the common power distributionbox does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm related to the commonpower distribution box.

ON The common power distribution box isfaulty. During the self-check of theMDMC board, however, the ALM LEDis also on. This indicates that the ALMLED is functional.

NOTE

When the common power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time,indicating that the MDMC board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, the RUNand ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of the common powerdistribution box.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

Page 62: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

4.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution BoxThe components on the rear panel of the common power distribution box are the power inputterminal block, power output terminal block, and port used to connect the power distributionbox to a subrack.

Figure 4-5 shows the rear panel of the common power distribution box.

Figure 4-5 Rear panel of the common power distribution box

(1) Power input terminal block (2) Power output terminal block (3) Port used to connect the powerdistribution box to a subrack

(4) COM1 port (port used to connectthe power distribution box to an EMU)

(5) COM2 port

NOTE

l Figure 4-5 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box.

l The port on the power distribution box is connected to the bottom subrack through the monitoringsignal cable for the power distribution box.

On the power input terminal block and power output terminal block, the wiring terminals forthe -48 V power cable and RTN power cable are labeled -48 V and RTN, respectively.

4.2.3 Technical Specifications of the Common Power DistributionBox

This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of thecommon power distribution box.

Table 4-5 describes the technical specifications of the common power distribution box.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

Page 63: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 4-5 Technical specifications of the common power distribution box

Item Specification

Power consumption 30 W

Input Rated input voltage -48 V DC

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC

Input mode Two -48 V DC inputs

Max. input current Two power inputs. Themaximum current of eachinput is 100 A.

Output Rated output voltage -48 V DC

Output voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC

Output mode and current Six groups of independentpower outputs. Each grouphas one -48 V DC poweroutput and one RTN poweroutput. Each output can beswitched on or off, and isprovided with the powersurge protection function.When the total current of thesix outputs is smaller than100 A, the maximum currentof each output is 70 A.

Output protectionspecifications

The power surge protectionpoint is 87.5 A. You need tomanually switch on thecorresponding MCB afterthe power surge protection.

Rated output power Hot backup mode: 4,800 W

4.2.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common PowerDistribution Box

There is a fixed relationship between the six outputs of the common power distribution box andthe components in the cabinet.

Distribution of Power Switches in the MPR (Configured with the OMU Board)/EPR/TCR

When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the distribution of power switches on thecommon power distribution box in the MPR is the same as the distribution of power switcheson the common power distribution box in the EPR/TCR. Figure 4-6 shows the relationshipbetween the six power switches on the common power distribution box and the components in

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

Page 64: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

the cabinet. Table 4-6 describes the relationship between the six power switches on the commonpower distribution box and the components in the cabinet.

Figure 4-6 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR (configuredwith the OMU board)/EPR/TCR

Table 4-6 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR (configuredwith the OMU board)/EPR/TCR

Component Power Switch

Subrack 2 SW1, SW4

Subrack 1 SW2, SW5

Subrack 0 SW3, SW6

Distribution of Power Switches in the MPR (Configured with the GBAM)Figure 4-7 shows the relationship between the six power switches on the common powerdistribution box and the components in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM. Table4-7 describes the relationship between the six power switches on the common power distributionbox and the components in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

Page 65: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 4-7 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR (configuredwith the GBAM)

Table 4-7 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR (configuredwith the GBAM)

Component Power Switch

Subrack 1 SW1, SW4

Subrack 0 SW2, SW5

KVM SW3

LAN switch SW3

GBAM SW3, SW6

4.3 Air Defence SubrackThe air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-throughair channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.

Physical appearance

Figure 4-8 shows the air defence subrack.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

Page 66: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 4-8 Air defence subrack

DimensionsThe dimensions of the air defence subrack are 44.45 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 476.1 mm(depth).

4.4 Rear Cable TroughThe rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cabletrough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.

Figure 4-9 shows the rear cable trough.

Figure 4-9 Rear cable trough

4.5 Cable TrayThe cable tray provides space for the routing of the Ethernet cables for the LAN switch.

Figure 4-10 shows the cable tray.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

Page 67: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 4-10 cable tray

4.6 KVMKVM is an abbreviation for Keyboard, Video, and Mouse. It is the operation platform of theGBAM. The KVM is optional. It is installed in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.

Appearance

Figure 4-11 shows the KVM.

Figure 4-11 KVM

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

Page 68: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Front Panel

Figure 4-12 shows the front panel of the KVM.

Figure 4-12 Front panel of the KVM

(1) Handles (2) Switch on the KVM

Back Panel

Figure 4-13 shows the back panel of the KVM.

Figure 4-13 Back panel of the KVM

(1) Ground bolt (2) DC input power socket(3) Power switch (4) Ports used to connect to the keyboard, video, and mouse

NOTE

To insert the KVM into the cabinet, press the white buttons on both sides of the KVM and slide the buttonswith index fingers, and at the same time insert the KVM into the cabinet. Then, release the buttons.

4.7 LAN SwitchThe LAN switch is configured in the MPR.

The LAN switch has 10M/100M adaptive full-duplex BASE-TX Ethernet ports. The LANswitch connects the LMT PC to the BSC6900 and then connects the BSC6900 to the M2000.

Physical Appearance of the LAN Switch

The BSC6900 uses the Quidway S3026C LAN switches.

Figure 4-14 shows the LAN switch.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

Page 69: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 4-14 LAN switch

Front Panel of the LAN Switch

The components on the front panel of the LAN switch are mode switch button, configurationport, LEDs, and Ethernet ports.

Figure 4-15 shows the front panel of the LAN switch.

Figure 4-15 Front panel of the LAN switch

(1) POWER LED (2) Mode status LED (A/L LED)(3) Mode status LED (D/S LED) (4) Mode switch button (MODE button)(5) 10M/100M adaptive full-duplex BASE-TX Ethernet ports (6) Configuration port (CONSOLE port)

NOTE

l The CONSOLE port is used to configure the LAN switch to meet the requirements of theBSC6900.

l The MODE button is used to enable the LEDs for the 10M/100M Ethernet ports to display differenttypes of states.

LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch

There are three LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch: POWER LED, A/L LED, and D/SLED.

Table 4-8 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

Page 70: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 4-8 LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch

LED Color Status Description

POWER GreenON The LAN switch is powered on.

OFF The LAN switch is powered off.

A/L

Yellow(left)

ON (blink) The port is in ACTIVE mode, and there is traffic overthe port.

OFF The port is in ACTIVE mode, and there is no trafficover the port.

Green(right)

ON The port is in LINK OK mode (indicating correctconnection).

OFF The port is in LINK FAULT mode (indicating noconnection) or in LINK ERROR mode (indicatingincorrect connection).

D/S

Yellow(left)

ON The port is in FULL DUPLEX mode.

OFF The port is in HALF DUPLEX mode.

Green(right)

ON The rate of the Ethernet port is 100 Mbit/s.

OFF The rate of the Ethernet port is 10 Mbit/s.

NOTE

Only ports 2, 4, 20, 22, 24 on the LAN switch are used.

Rear Panel of the LAN SwitchThe components on the rear panel of the LAN switch are DC power socket and grounding postfor the PGND cable.

Figure 4-16 shows the rear panel of the LAN switch.

Figure 4-16 Rear panel of the LAN switch

(1) DC power socket (2) Grounding post for the PGND cable

4.8 GBAMThe BSC6900 uses three models of GBAM: IBM X3650T, HUAWEI C5210, and HP CC3310.The GBAM is installed in the MPR.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

Page 71: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

4.8.1 Functions of GBAMThe GBAM works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance Terminal(LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.

The GBAM performs the following functions:

l Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,security management, and loading management functions for the system

l Provides the LMT or M2000 users with the operation and maintenance port of theBSC6900 system to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUaboard of the BSC6900

4.8.2 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).

Figure 4-17 shows the GBAM (IBM X3650T).

Figure 4-17 GBAM (IBM X3650T)

Front Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)

The components on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) are LEDs, ports, switches, anda CD-ROM drive.

Figure 4-18 shows the front panel of the GBAM server (IBM X3650T).

Figure 4-18 Front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)

Table 4-9 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

Page 72: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 4-9 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)

No. Silkscreen Label Description

1 None CD-ROM drive

2 Power switch

3 Reset switch

4 CRT The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarmindication. When this LED is on (yellow), a criticalfault has occurred on the system and the systemcannot work properly.

5 MJR The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication.When this LED is on (yellow), a major fault hasoccurred on the system. When this occurs, thesystem can still work properly; however,performance deteriorates significantly.

6 MNR The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarmindication. When the LED is on (yellow), a minorfault has occurred on the system. When this occurs,the system can still work properly.

7 PWR The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarmindication. When this LED is on (yellow), thepower supply for the system is faulty.

8 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The portdoes not require a signal cable or connection toother devices when the system runs properly.Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

9 USB port.The port does not require a signal cableor connection to other devices when the systemruns properly. Therefore, equipment security is notaffected.

10 0 Hard disk 0 activity LED. When this LED is on(green), it indicates that the data on hard disk 0 canbe normally read or written to. When this LED ison (yellow), it indicates that hard disk 0 is faulty.

11 1 Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on(green), the data on hard disk 1 can be normallyread or written to. When this LED is on (yellow),hard disk 1 is faulty.

12 ON Main power LED

13 NIC0/NIC1 activity LED

14 System ID LED

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

Page 73: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

No. Silkscreen Label Description

15 ID switch, used to switch system IDs

16 None NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop thesystem to perform fault diagnosis.

Rear Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)

The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) are power port, grounding post,and other ports.

Figure 4-19 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).

Figure 4-19 Rear panel of the GBAM

Table 4-10 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).

Table 4-10 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)

No. SilkscreenLabel

Description

1 Alarms DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from theGBAM)

2 None PCI card bracket (with no card inserted)

3 None PCI card bracket (with a card inserted)

4 None 10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter

5 None Power module

6 PS/2 mouse/keyboard ports. The upper port is for themouse, and the lower one is for the keyboard.

7 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port doesnot require a signal cable or connection to other deviceswhen the system runs properly. Therefore, equipmentsecurity is not affected.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

Page 74: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

No. SilkscreenLabel

Description

8 1 RJ45 NIC port 1

9 2 RJ45 NIC port 2

10 Port for the video

11 1 USB port 1.The port does not require a signal cable orconnection to other devices when the system runsproperly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

12 0 USB port 0.The port does not require a signal cable orconnection to other devices when the system runsproperly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

13 Server management port

14 Ultra320 SCSI port

15 Grounding post for the PGND cable

4.8.3 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).

Figure 4-20 shows the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).

Figure 4-20 GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

Front Panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)The components on the front panel of the GBAM (C5210) are LEDs, ports, switches, and a CD-ROM drive.

Figure 4-21 shows the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

Page 75: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 4-21 Front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

Table 4-11 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).

Table 4-11 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

No.SilkscreenLabel Description

1 None CD-ROM drive

2 Power switch

3 Reset switch

4 CRT The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication. When theLED is on (yellow), a critical fault has occurred on the system,and the system cannot work properly.

5 MJR The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication. When thisLED is on (yellow), a major fault has occurred on the system.When this occurs, the system can still work properly; however,performance deteriorates significantly.

6 MNR The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication. When thisLED is on (yellow), a minor fault has occurred on the system.When this occurs, the system can still work properly.

7 PWR The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication. When thisLED is on (yellow), the power supply for the system is faulty.

8 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port does notrequire a signal cable or connection to other devices when thesystem runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is notaffected.

9 USB port.The port does not require a signal cable or connectionto other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore,equipment security is not affected.10

11 2 Hard disk 2 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), itindicates that the data on hard disk 2 can be normally read orwritten to. When this LED is on (yellow), hard disk 2 is faulty.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

Page 76: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

No.SilkscreenLabel Description

12 1 Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), itindicates that the data on hard disk 1 can be normally read orwritten to. When this LED is on (yellow), hard disk 1 is faulty.

13 ON Main power LED

14 NIC0/NIC1 activity LED

15 System ID LED

16 ID switch, used to switch system IDs

17 None NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the system toperform fault diagnosis.

Rear Panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210) are power port, groundingpost, and other ports.

Figure 4-22 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).

Figure 4-22 Rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

Table 4-12 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).

Table 4-12 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

No. SilkscreenLabel

Description

1 1 USB port 1.The port does not require a signal cable orconnection to other devices when the system runs properly.Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

2 Port for the video

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

Page 77: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

No. SilkscreenLabel

Description

3 Ultra320 SCSI port

4 1 RJ45 NIC port 1

5 Integrated port for mouse and keyboard. You can use a Y-shaped cable to connect the mouse and keyboard to theGBAM (C5210).

6 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port does notrequire a signal cable or connection to other devices whenthe system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security isnot affected.

7 2 USB port 2.The port does not require a signal cable orconnection to other devices when the system runs properly.Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

8 None 10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter

9 Grounding post for the PGND cable

10 None DC input power socket (wiring terminal "-" is for the -48 Vpower cable, and wiring terminal "+" is for the RTN cable.)

11 Alarms DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from theGBAM)

12 0 RJ45 NIC port 0

4.8.4 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310).

Figure 4-23 shows the GBAM (HP CC3310).

Figure 4-23 GBAM (HP CC3310)

Front Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)The components on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) are LEDs, ports, switches, anda CD-ROM drive.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

Page 78: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 4-24 shows the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).

Figure 4-24 Front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)

Table 4-13 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).

Table 4-13 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)

No.SilkscreenLabel Description

1 None CD-ROM drive

2 Power switch

3 Reset switch

4 CRT The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication. When theLED is on (yellow), a critical fault has occurred on the systemand the system cannot work properly.

5 MJR The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication. When thisLED is on (yellow), a major fault has occurred on the system.When this occurs, the system can still work properly; however,performance deteriorates significantly.

6 MNR The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication. When thisLED is on (yellow), a minor fault has occurred on the system.When this occurs, the system can still work properly.

7 PWR The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication. When thisLED is on (yellow), the power supply for the system is faulty.

8 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port does notrequire a signal cable or connection to other devices when thesystem runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is notaffected.

9 USB port.The port does not require a signal cable or connectionto other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore,equipment security is not affected.10

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

Page 79: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

No.SilkscreenLabel Description

11 2 Hard disk 2 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), thedata on hard disk 2 can be normally read or written to. Whenthis LED is on (yellow), hard disk 2 is faulty.

12 1 Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), thedata on hard disk 1 can be normally read or written to. Whenthis LED is on (yellow), hard disk 1 is faulty.

13 ON Main power LED

14 NIC0/NIC1 activity LED

15 System ID LED

16 ID switch, used to switch system IDs

17 None NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the system toperform fault diagnosis.

Rear Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) are power port, grounding post,and other ports.

Figure 4-25 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).

Figure 4-25 Rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)

Table 4-14 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

Page 80: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 4-14 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)

No. Silkscreen Label Description

1 1 USB port 1.The port does not require a signal cable orconnection to other devices when the system runsproperly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

2 Port for the video

3 Ultra320 SCSI port

4 1 RJ45 NIC port 1

5 Integrated port for mouse and keyboard. You can use aY-shaped cable to connect the mouse and keyboard tothe GBAM (HP CC3310).

6 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port doesnot require a signal cable or connection to other deviceswhen the system runs properly. Therefore, equipmentsecurity is not affected.

7 2 USB port 2.The port does not require a signal cable orconnection to other devices when the system runsproperly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

8 None 10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter

9 Grounding post for the PGND cable

10 None DC input power socket (wiring terminal "-" is for the -48V power cable, and wiring terminal "+" is for the RTNcable.)

11 Alarms DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from theGBAM)

12 0 RJ45 NIC port 0

4.9 Independent Fan SubrackBesides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fansubrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.

4.9.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan SubrackThe independent fan subrack is composed of the front panel, fan box, and the rear panel.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

Page 81: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Front View of the Independent Fan Subrack

Figure 4-26 Front view of the independent fan subrack

(1) PFCU board (2) Fans (3) Handle of the independent fan subrack(4) Screw (5) LED on the fan box

NOTE

The PFCU is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.20 PFCU Board.

Rear View of the Independent Fan Subrack

Figure 4-27 Rear view of the independent fan subrack

(1) Monitor 1 Port, used to connect to the powerdistribution box

(2) Power input port (3) Monitor 2 Port (Reserved)

(4) Monitor 0 Port, used to connect to subracks (5) Monitor 3 Port (Reserved)

4.9.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan SubrackThe technical specifications of the independent fan subrack refer to the dimensions, weight,power supply, maximum power consumption, fan speed, and Electromagnetic Compatibility(EMC).

Table 4-15 describes the technical specifications of the independent fan subrack.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

Page 82: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 4-15 Technical specifications of the independent fan subrack

Item Specification

Dimensions 86.1 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)

Weight Empty subrack: ≤ 2.4 kg; subrack with fan boxes: ≤ 6.9kg

Power supply -48 V DC. The input voltage ranges from -40 V DC to -60V DC.

Maximum power consumption ≤ 150 W

Fan speed < 5.0 m/s

EMC Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386 V1.2.1(2000-03).

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

Page 83: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

5 Subracks

About This Chapter

This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form anindependent unit.

5.1 Classification of SubracksBased on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS), extendedprocessing subrack (EPS), and transcoder subrack (TCS).

5.2 Components of the SubrackThe main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.

5.3 Slots in the SubrackThe backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the frontand rear sides of the backplane. Each slot provides a different switching bandwidth. Check thebandwidth of the slot before installing a board. A board must be installed in a slot with enoughbandwidth.

5.4 DIP Switch on the SubrackThe DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

5.5 Configuration of the SubrackThe BSC6900 subrack configuration includes the typical configuration of the MPS, EPS, andTCS in different subrack configuration modes.

5.6 Technical Specifications of the SubrackThe technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available spaceheight, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

Page 84: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

5.1 Classification of SubracksBased on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS), extendedprocessing subrack (EPS), and transcoder subrack (TCS).

MPSAs the main processing subrack, the MPS is configured in the MPR. Only one MPS is configuredin the BSC6900. The MPS processes the basic services of the BSC6900, performs operation andmaintenance, and provides clock signals for the system.

EPSAs the extended processing subrack, the EPS is configured in the MPR or EPR. It processes thebasic services of the BSC6900.

TCSAs the transcoder subrack, the TCS is configured in the MPR, EPR, or TCR in BM/TC separatedconfiguration mode. It performs transcoding, rate adaptation, and sub-multiplexing.

5.2 Components of the SubrackThe main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.

Structure of the SubrackIn compliance with the IEC60297 standard, each subrack is 19 inches in width and 12 U inheight. Figure 5-1 shows the construction of the subrack with the front and rear views of thecomponent layouts of the subrack.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

Page 85: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 5-1 Construction of the subrack

(1) Fan box (2) Mounting ear (3) Guide rail(4) Front cable trough (5) Boards (6) Ground screw

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

Page 86: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

(7) DC power input port (8) Port for the monitoring signal cable of thepower distribution box

(9) Cover plate of the DIP switch

ComponentsTable 5-1 describes the components of the subrack.

Table 5-1 Components of the subrack

Component Refer to...

Fan box 5.2.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCUBoard)

Slots in the subrack 5.3 Slots in the Subrack

Front cable trough The front cable trough is used to lead the cablesfrom the front of the subrack to both sides of thecabinet.

Backplane The backplane is used to connect the boards inthe same subrack.

5.2.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)The fan box is used for heat dissipation in the cabinet. Each subrack is configured with one fanbox. This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan boxwhen the fan box is configured with the PFCU board. This also describes the technicalspecifications of the fan box.

Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles.

Figure 5-2 shows the fan box.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

Page 87: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 5-2 Fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

(1) Power unit of the fan box (2) Fans (3) PFCU board(4) LED on the fan box (5) Screws (6) Handles of the fan box

NOTE

l The power unit is inserted into the rear part of the fan box. It provides power supply for nine fans andkeeps the voltage stable through a stabilizing tube, to ensure normal operation of the fans.

l The PFCU board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.20 PFCUBoard.

LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box.

Table 5-2 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates.

Table 5-2 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

Color Status Description

Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The fan box works normally (thefan box is registered).

ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s The fan box works normally (thefan box is not registered).

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

Page 88: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Color Status Description

Red ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The fan box is registered and hasone of the following problems:l One-way power supply to

the subrackl Communication failurel Fans ceasing to run or

running at too low a speedl Fan box in an excessively

high temperature ortemperature sensor failure

ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s The fan box is not registered andhas one of the followingproblems:l One-way power supply to

the subrackl Fans ceasing to run or

running at a too low speedl Fan box in an excessively

high temperature ortemperature sensor failure

NOTE

When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa/SCUb board in thesame subrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan boxand the SCUa/SCUb board in the same subrack is not established.

Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, voltage, maximum power,detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment.

Table 5-3 lists the technical specifications of the fan box.

Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

Item Specification

Space height 1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

Input voltage range -42 V DC to -60 V DC

Maximum power 150 W

Detectable temperature range -5°C to 55°C

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from55% to 100% of the full speed.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

Page 89: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

NOTE

When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fansin the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.

5.3 Slots in the SubrackThe backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the frontand rear sides of the backplane. Each slot provides a different switching bandwidth. Check thebandwidth of the slot before installing a board. A board must be installed in a slot with enoughbandwidth.

Structure of the SubrackFigure 5-3 shows the structure of the subrack.

Figure 5-3 Structure of the subrack

(1) Front slot (2) Backplane (3) Rear slot

NOTE

l Each subrack provides a total of 28 slots. The 14 slots on the front side of the backplane are numberedfrom 00 to 13, and those on the rear side from 14 to 27.

l Two neighboring slots, such as slot 00 and slot 01 or slot 02 and slot 03, can be configured as a pairof active/standby slots. A pair of active and standby boards must be installed in a pair of active andstandby slots. For example, if slot 00 is configured with the XPUa board, then slot 01 must be configuredwith the XPUa board and slot 01 cannot be configured with the XPUb board.

l Different types of boards can be installed in all slots other than active/standby slots. For example, ifslot 00 and slot 01 are configured with XPUa boards, slot 02 and slot 03 can be configured withXPUb boards.

l If the boards are in resource pool mode, then they can be installed in active/standby slots. For example,if slot 08 is configured with the DPUc board, slot 09 can be configured with the DPUf board.

5.4 DIP Switch on the SubrackThe DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

Page 90: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Location of the DIP SwitchThe DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of theDIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.

AppearanceFigure 5-4 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.

Figure 5-4 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack

Description about the DIP SwitchThe DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. Thehigher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 5-4 describes the bits.

Table 5-4 Description about the bits

Bit Description

1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is theleast significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bitis set to OFF, it indicates 1.

6 Odd parity check bit

7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

Page 91: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Bit Description

8 (the most significantbit)

Startup type of the subrack, the default value is OFF.NOTEl For the inventory sites upgrading from BSC6000 to BSC6900, keep

the former settings.

l For the new sites in BSC6900, the bit is conservative and is fixed toOFF.

CAUTIONl You must set the DIP switch before powering on the subrack. The setting after the power-

on is invalid.

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting

As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an oddnumber. The method for setting the bits is as follows:

1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.

2. Set bit 7 to ON.

3. Set bit 8 to OFF.

4. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch.

l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.

l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.

Table 5-5 describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.

Table 5-5 Setting of the DIP switch

SubrackNo.

Bit Setting of theDIP Switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

Page 92: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

SubrackNo.

Bit Setting of theDIP Switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF

4 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

ON ON OFF

ON ON OFF ON OFF

5 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

OFF ON OFF

ON ON ON ON OFF

5.5 Configuration of the SubrackThe BSC6900 subrack configuration includes the typical configuration of the MPS, EPS, andTCS in different subrack configuration modes.

Principles for installing boards are as follows:

l The SCUa and SCUb boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7.

l The GCUa and GCUb boards must be installed in slots 12 and 13 in the MPS.

l The TNUa board must be installed in slot 4 or 5.

l The OMUa and OMUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to27 in the MPS at the bottom of the MPR. For existing BSC6900s, the OMUa and OMUbboards can be installed in slots 20 to 23. For new BSC6900s, the OMUa and OMUbboards can be installed in slots 24 to 27.

l The OMUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPSat the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 and 25 are recommended.

l The XPUa/XPUb/DPUa/DPUc/DPUd/DPUf/DPUg board is preferentially installed in thefront slots of a subrack. These boards are installed in the rear slots of the subrack only whenthe slots in the front are occupied.

l Interface boards must be installed in the rear slots of a subrack to facilitate cable routing.

l Interface boards FG2c, GOUc, and UOIc are preferentially installed in slots 16 to 23,because these boards have a high processing capability. These boards can be installed inslots 14, 15, and 24 to 27 when slots 16 to 23 are occupied.

5.5.1 Configuration of the MPSThe boards installed in the MPS depend on the subrack configuration mode used by theBSC6900.

The boards that can be installed in the MPS are the OMUc, SCUb, GCUa, GCGa, TNUa, XPUa/XPUb, DPUf, DPUg, EIUa, FG2a/FG2c/FG2d, GOUa/GOUc/GOUd, POUc, OIUa, and PEUa.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

Page 93: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

The following figures show the configurations of the MPS in BM/TC separated, BM/TCcombined modes.

Figure 5-5 Configuration of the MPS in BM/TC separated mode

Figure 5-6 Configuration of the MPS in BM/TC combined mode

NOTE

l The INT1 board (interface board) can be the PEUa, EIUa, OIUa, FG2a/FG2c/FG2d, POUc, or GOUa/GOUc/GOUd.

l The INT2 board (interface board) can be the PEUa, EIUa, OIUa, or POUc.

l If customers have also purchased the Huawei Nastar product, they need to install an SAU board in the MPSor EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby mode). Fordetails on how to install software on the SAU board and how to maintain the SAU board, see the SAU UserGuide of Nastar documents.

l The preceding figures are for your reference only and cannot be used for site planning. Site planning shouldbe performed based on the actual conditions and on the instructions in the BSC6900 ConfigurationPrinciples.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

Page 94: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

5.5.2 Configuration of the EPSThe boards installed in the EPS depend on the subrack configuration mode used by theBSC6900.

The boards that can be installed in the EPS are the SCUb, TNUa, XPUa/XPUb, DPUf, DPUg,EIUa, FG2a/FG2c/FG2d, GOUa/GOUc/GOUd, POUc, OIUa, and PEUa.

The following figures show the configurations of the EPS in BM/TC separated, BM/TCcombined modes.

Figure 5-7 Configuration of the EPS in BM/TC separated mode

Figure 5-8 Configuration of the EPS in BM/TC combined mode

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

Page 95: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

NOTE

l The INT board (interface board) can be the PEUa, EIUa, OIUa, FG2a/FG2c/FG2d, POUc, or GOUa/GOUc/GOUd.

l If customers have also purchased the Huawei Nastar product, they need to install an SAU board in the MPSor EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby mode). Fordetails on how to install software on the SAU board and how to maintain the SAU board, see the SAU UserGuide of Nastar documents.

l The preceding figures are for your reference only and cannot be used for site planning. Site planning shouldbe performed based on the actual conditions and on the instructions in the BSC6900 ConfigurationPrinciples.

5.5.3 Configuration of the TCSIn BM/TC separated mode, the TCS can be configured in the TCR.

By default, the TCS must be configured with the SCUb and TNUa boards. The DPUf/DPUgboard and EIUa/OIUa board are optional boards.

Figure 5-9 shows the configuration of the TCS in A over E1/T1 mode.

Figure 5-9 Configuration of the TCS in A over E1/T1 mode

Figure 5-10 shows the configuration of the TCS in A over STM-1 mode.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

Page 96: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 5-10 Configuration of the TCS in A over STM-1 mode

NOTE

The preceding figures are for your reference only and cannot be used for site planning. Site planning should beperformed based on the actual conditions and on the instructions in the BSC6900 Configuration Principles.

5.6 Technical Specifications of the SubrackThe technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available spaceheight, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.

Table 5-6 describes the technical specifications of the subrack.

Table 5-6 Technical specifications of the subrack

Item Specification

Dimensions 530.6 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)

Available space height 12 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight Empty subrack: 25 kg; subrack configured with boards:≤ 57 kg

Power consumption in fullconfiguration

l MPS: ≤ 1,400 Wl EPS: ≤ 1,400 Wl TCS: ≤ 1,000 W

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

Page 97: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6 Boards

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.

NOTE

If a board is configured in independent mode, its slot can switch a maximum of 4096 timeslots. If boards areconfigured in active/standby mode, their slots can switch a maximum of 7168 timeslots.

The BSC6900 boards perform different functions through the loading of different software.Table 6-1 describes the BSC6900 boards.

Table 6-1 Classification of BSC6900 boards

Boards

Logical Function InterfaceSupported

Shared by BackplaneBandwidth ofthe Board Whenthe SCUa BoardIs Installed inthe SameSubrack

BackplaneBandwidth ofthe Board Whenthe SCUb BoardIs Installed inthe SameSubrack

DPUa GTC (GSM speechservice processing)

- - 2 GE 2 GE

DPUc GTC (GSM speechservice processing)

- - 2 GE 2 GE

DPUd GPCU (GSMpacket serviceprocessing)

- - 2 GE 2 GE

DPUf GTC (GSM speechservice processing)

- - 4 GE 4 GE

DPUg GPCU (GSMpacket serviceprocessing)

- - 4 GE 4 GE

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

Page 98: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Boards

Logical Function InterfaceSupported

Shared by BackplaneBandwidth ofthe Board Whenthe SCUa BoardIs Installed inthe SameSubrack

BackplaneBandwidth ofthe Board Whenthe SCUb BoardIs Installed inthe SameSubrack

EIUa Abis_TDM A, Abis, Ater, andPb

Cannot be sharedby multipleinterfaces

2 GE 2 GE

Ater_TDM

Pb_TDM

A_TDM

FG2a GbIP (GSM BSCGb IP interface)

A, Abis, and Gb Abis and A 2 GE 2 GE

IP

FG2c IP Abis, A, and Gb Abis, A, and Gb 4 GE 20 GE

FG2d IP Abis, A, and Gb Abis, A, and Gb 4 GE 20 GE

GCUa

Clock - - 2 GE 2 GE

GOUa

IP A, and Abis Abis and A 2 GE 2 GE

GOUc

IP Abis, A, and Gb Abis, A, and Gb 4 GE 20 GE

GOUd

IP Abis, A, and Gb Abis, A, and Gb 4 GE 20 GE

OIUa Abis_TDM A, Abis, Ater, andPb

Cannot be sharedby multipleinterfaces

2 GE 2 GE

Ater_TDM

Pb_TDM

A_TDM

OMUa

OAM (OMmanagement)

- - 2 GE 2 GE

OMUb

OAM (OMmanagement)

- - 2 GE 2 GE

OMUc

OAM (OMmanagement)

- - 2 GE 20 GE

PEUa FR Abis, and Gb, A Cannot be sharedby multipleinterfaces

2 GE 2 GE

HDLC

IP

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

Page 99: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Boards

Logical Function InterfaceSupported

Shared by BackplaneBandwidth ofthe Board Whenthe SCUa BoardIs Installed inthe SameSubrack

BackplaneBandwidth ofthe Board Whenthe SCUb BoardIs Installed inthe SameSubrack

POUc TDM A, Abis, Gb, Ater,and Pb

l Abis, Ater, Gb,and Pb (the Gbinterface andthe Pbinterface donot share aboard)

l A and Gb

4 GE 20 GE

IP Abis and Ater

SCUa MAC Switching - - - -

SCUb MAC Switching - - - -

TNUa TDM Switching - - 2 GE 2 GE

XPUa GCP (GSM BSCcontrol planeprocessing)

- - 2 GE 2 GE

RGCP (Resourcemanagement andGSM BSC controlplane processing)

MCP (MathematicsComputingProcess)

XPUb GCP (GSM BSCcontrol planeprocessing)

- - 2 GE 4 GE

RGCP (Resourcemanagement andGSM BSC controlplane processing)

MCP (MathematicsComputingProcess)

PAMU

- - - - -

PFCU - - - - -

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

Page 100: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.1 DPUa BoardDPUa refers to Data Processing Unit REV:a.

6.2 DPUc BoardDPUc refers to Data Processing Unit REV:c.

6.3 DPUd BoardDPUd refers to Data Processing Unit REV:d.

6.4 DPUf BoardDPUf refers to Data Processing Unit REV:f.

6.5 DPUg BoardDPUg refers to Data Processing Unit REV:g.

6.6 EIUa BoardEIUa refers to 32-port E1/T1 circuit Interface Unit REV:a.

6.7 FG2a BoardFG2a is short for 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV: a.

6.8 FG2c BoardFG2c is short for 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c.

6.9 FG2d BoardFG2d refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:d.

6.10 GCUa and GCGa BoardGCUa is short for General Clock Unit REV: a. GCGa is short for General Clock Unit with GPSREV: a.

6.11 GOUa BoardGOUa is short for 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV: a.

6.12 GOUc BoardGOUc is short for 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV :c.

6.13 GOUd BoardGOUd refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:d.

6.14 MDMC BoardMDMC refers to Distribution Monitor and Communication board. It is configured in thecommon power distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with oneMDMC board.

6.15 OIUa BoardOIUa refers to 1-port channelized Optical STM-1 Interface Unit REV:a.

6.16 OMUa and OMUb BoardOMUa is short for Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. OMUb is short for Operation andMaintenance Unit REV:b.

6.17 OMUc BoardOMUc is short for Operation and Maintenance Unit REV: c.

6.18 PAMU BoardPAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the powerdistribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMUboard.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

Page 101: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.19 PEUa BoardPEUa is short for 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV: a.

6.20 PFCU BoardPFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Eachfan box is configured with one PFCU board.

6.21 POUc BoardPOUc refers to 4-port TDM/IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c.

6.22 SCUa BoardSCUa is short for GE Switching network and Control Unit REV: a.

6.23 SCUb BoardSCUb is short for GE Switching network and Control Unit REV: b.

6.24 TNUa BoardTNUa refers to TDM switching Network Unit REV:a. The TNUa board is optional. In aBSC6900 using the Abis over IP and A over IP mode, the TNUa boards do not need to beconfigured. In a BSC6900 using other modes, install two TNUa boards in slots 4 and 5 of theMPS, EPS, and TCS.

6.25 XPUa BoardXPUa refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:a. The XPUa board is optional. Two to tenXPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installedin slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23, slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUa boards can beinstalled in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.

6.26 XPUb BoardXPUb refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:b. The XPUb board is optional. Two to tenXPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the XPUb boards canbe installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23, slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUbboards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.

6.27 WOPB BoardWOPB refers to Overvoltage Protection Board. It is configured in the common powerdistribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one WOPB board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

Page 102: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.1 DPUa BoardDPUa refers to Data Processing Unit REV:a.

The DPUa board is optional. It can be installed in the TCS. Install at least two boards in eachsubrack. The number of boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number ofavailable slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how tocalculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be deliveredto customers during the marketing phase. When E1/T1 interface boards are installed in the TCS,install the DPUa boards in slots 4 to 5 and 9 to 13. When STM-1 interface boards are installedin the TCS, install the DPUa boards in slots 1 to 5 and 8 to 13.

6.1.1 Functions of the DPUa BoardThe DPUa board processes GSM voice services.

The DPUa board has 22 logical subsystems.

The DPUa board performs the following functions:l Encodes and decodes voice servicesl Provides data service rate adaptationl Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function

When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signalsare encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of voice services.

l Provides the voice enhancement functionl Detects voice faults automatically

6.1.2 Panel of the DPUa BoardThere are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUa board.

Figure 6-1 shows the panel of the DPUa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

Page 103: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-1 Panel of the DPUa board

6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-2 describes the LEDs on the DPUa board.

Table 6-2 LEDs on the DPUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The board is functional.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

Page 104: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it isabnormal.

6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUa BoardThe technical specifications of the DPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.

Table 6-3 describes the technical specifications of the DPUa board.

Table 6-3 Technical specifications of the DPUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.

Power consumption 60 W

Weight 1.26 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability Supporting 960 TCH/Fs

6.2 DPUc BoardDPUc refers to Data Processing Unit REV:c.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

Page 105: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

The DPUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, and TCS. Install at least twoboards in each subrack. The number of boards to be installed depends on site requirements andthe number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installedand how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document willbe delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the DPUc board can beinstalled in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUc board can beinstalled in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27. For the TCS, the DPUc board can be installed in slots 0 to5, slots 8 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUc boards can be installedin slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUc boards can be installed in slots24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.2.1 Functions of the DPUc BoardThe DPUc board processes GSM voice services.

The DPUc board has 22 logical subsystems.

The DPUc board performs the following functions:

l Provides the speech format conversion and data forwarding functions– In BM/TC combined mode, the DPUc board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding

function if the A interface uses IP transmission.– In BM/TC separated mode, the DPUc board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding

functions if the BTS uses IP or HDLC transmission.l Encodes and decodes voice services

– In BM/TC combined mode, the DPUc board in the MPS or EPS performs the precedingfunction if the A interface uses TDM transmission.

– In BM/TC separated mode, the DPUc board in the TCS performs the preceding function.l Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function. This function is supported only in A

over TDM mode.When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signalsare encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of speech services.

l Provides the voice enhancement function. This function is supported only in A over TDMmode.

l Detects voice faults automatically

6.2.2 Panel of the DPUc BoardThere are only LEDs on the DPUc board.

Figure 6-2 shows the panel of the DPUc board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

Page 106: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-2 Panel of the DPUc board

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

Page 107: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUc BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board.

Table 6-4 LEDs on the DPUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software orit is abnormal.

6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc BoardThe technical specifications of the DPUc board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

Table 6-5 describes the technical specifications of the DPUc board.

Table 6-5 Technical specifications of the DPUc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.

Power consumption 49.40 W

Weight 1.26 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

Page 108: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability Supporting 960 TCH/Fs; supporting 3,740Interworking Function(IWF) flow numbers

6.3 DPUd BoardDPUd refers to Data Processing Unit REV:d.

The DPUd board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. Install at least two boards ineach subrack. The number of boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the numberof available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and howto calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will bedelivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the DPUd board can beinstalled in 0 to 5, 8 to 11, or 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUd board can be installed in slots 0to 5, 8 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUd boards can be installedin slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUd boards can be installed in slots24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.3.1 Functions of the DPUd BoardThe DPUd board processes GSM PS services.

The DPUd board has 22 logical subsystems.

The DPUd board performs the following functions:

l Processes the PS services on up to 1,024 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals arecoded in MCS9

l Processes packet linksl Detects packet faults automatically

6.3.2 Panel of the DPUd BoardThere are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUd board.

Figure 6-3 shows the panel of the DPUd board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

Page 109: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-3 Panel of the DPUd board

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

Page 110: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.3.3 LEDs on the DPUd BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-6 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board.

Table 6-6 LEDs on the DPUd board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or itis abnormal.

6.3.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd BoardThe technical specifications of the DPUd board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

Table 6-7 describes the technical specifications of the DPUd board.

Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the DPUd board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack isresponsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 49.40 W

Weight 1.26 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

Page 111: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability l Processing the PS services on up to 1,024simultaneously active PDCHs where signalsare coded in MCS9

l Processing in a cell the PS services on up to48 simultaneously active PDCHs wheresignals are coded in MCS9

6.4 DPUf BoardDPUf refers to Data Processing Unit REV:f.

The DPUf board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, and TCS. Install at least twoboards in each subrack. The number of boards to be installed depends on site requirements andthe number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installedand how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document willbe delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the DPUf board can beinstalled in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUf board can beinstalled in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27. For the TCS, the DPUf board can be installed in slots 0 to5, slots 8 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUe boards can be installedin slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUe boards can be installed in slots24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.4.1 Functions of the DPUf BoardThe DPUf board processes GSM voice services.

The DPUf board has 48 logical subsystems.

The DPUf board performs the following functions:

l Provides the speech format conversion and data forwarding functions– In BM/TC combined mode, the DPUf board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding

functions if the BTS uses IP transmission.– In BM/TC separated mode, the DPUf board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding

functions if the BTS uses IP or HDLC transmission.l Encodes and decodes voice services

– In BM/TC combined mode, the DPUf board in the MPS or EPS performs the precedingfunctions if the BTS uses TDM transmission.

– In BM/TC separated mode, the DPUf board in the TCS performs the preceding function.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

Page 112: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

l Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function. This function is supported only in Aover TDM mode.When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signalsare encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of voice services.

l Provides the voice enhancement function. This function is supported only in A over TDMmode.

l Detects voice faults automatically

6.4.2 Panel of the DPUf BoardThere are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUf board.

Figure 6-4 shows the panel of the DPUf board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

Page 113: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-4 Panel of the DPUf board

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

Page 114: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUf BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-8 describes the LEDs on the DPUf board.

Table 6-8 LEDs on the DPUf board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it isabnormal.

6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf BoardThe technical specifications of the DPUf board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

Table 6-9 describes the technical specifications of the DPUf board.

Table 6-9 Technical specifications of the DPUf board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.

Power consumption 70 W

Weight 1.40 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

Page 115: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability l Supporting 1,920 TCHFsl Supporting 7,680 IWF flow numbers in the

case of all-IP networking; Supporting 3,840IWF flow numbers in the case of Abis overTDM or Ater over TDM

6.5 DPUg BoardDPUg refers to Data Processing Unit REV:g.

The DPUg board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. Install at least two boards ineach subrack. The number of boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the numberof available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and howto calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will bedelivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the DPUg board can beinstalled in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUg board can beinstalled in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUg boards can be installedin slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUg boards can be installed in slots24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.5.1 Functions of the DPUg BoardThe DPUg board processes GSM PS services.

The DPUg board has 14 logical subsystems.

The DPUg board performs the following functions:

l Processes the PS services on up to 1,024 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals arecoded in MCS9

l Processes packet links

l Detects packet faults automatically

6.5.2 Panel of the DPUg BoardThere are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUg board.

Figure 6-5 shows the panel of the DPUg board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

Page 116: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-5 Panel of the DPUg board

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

Page 117: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUg BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUg board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-10 describes the LEDs on the DPUg board.

Table 6-10 LEDs on the DPUg board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or itis abnormal.

6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUg BoardThe technical specifications of the DPUg board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

Table 6-11 describes the technical specifications of the DPUg board.

Table 6-11 Technical specifications of the DPUg board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.

Power consumption 62 W

Weight 1.20 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

Page 118: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability l Processing the PS services on up to 1,024simultaneously active PDCHs where signalsare coded in MCS9

l Processing in a cell the PS services on up to110 simultaneously active PDCHs wheresignals are coded in MCS9

6.6 EIUa BoardEIUa refers to 32-port E1/T1 circuit Interface Unit REV:a.

The EIUa board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, and TCS. The number of theboards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For detailson the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, seeBSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during themarketing phase. For the MPS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS,the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the EIUa boards can be installedin slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the EIUa boards can be installed in slots24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.6.1 Functions of the EIUa BoardThe EIUa board provides E1/T1 transmission for the BSC6900.

The EIUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides four E1/T1 electrical ports for TDM transmissionl Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission rate is 2.048

Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/sl Processes signals according to the LAPD protocoll Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocoll Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby EIUa

boardsl Provides the OM links when the TCS is configured on the MSC sidel Supports the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces

6.6.2 Panel of the EIUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the EIUa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

Page 119: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-6 shows the panel of the EIUa board.

Figure 6-6 Panel of the EIUa board

6.6.3 LEDs on the EIUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-12 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board.

Table 6-12 LEDs on the EIUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

Page 120: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

6.6.4 Ports on the EIUa BoardThere are four E1/T1 ports, two clock signal output ports 2M0 and 2M1, and one TESTOUTport on the EIUa board.

Table 6-13 describes the ports on the EIUa board.

Table 6-13 Ports on the EIUa board

Port Function Connector Type

E1/T1 (0-7) E1/T1 port, used to transmit andreceive E1/T1 signals onchannels 0-7

DB44

E1/T1 (8-15) E1/T1 port, used to transmit andreceive E1/T1 signals onchannels 8-15

DB44

E1/T1 (16-23) E1/T1 port, used to transmit andreceive E1/T1 signals onchannels 16-23

DB44

E1/T1 (24-31) E1/T1 port, used to transmit andreceive E1/T1 signals onchannels 24-31

DB44

2M0 and 2M1 Ports for the 2.048 MHz clocksignal outputs, used to transmitthe clock signals obtained fromthe line clock for systemreference

SMB male connector

TESTOUT Port for clock signal outputs.The clock signals are used fortesting.

SMB male connector

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

Page 121: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.6.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa BoardThe EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.

Figure 6-7 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board.

Figure 6-7 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

NOTE

l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In thiscase, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON.

l When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode.In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF.

l All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced toand combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Table 6-14 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

Page 122: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 6-14 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm CoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

S1 8 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s 0-7

ON OFF

7 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s 8-15

ON OFF

6 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s16-23

ON OFF

5 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s24-31

ON OFF

1-4 Reserved - -

S3 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 0-7

ON OFF

S4 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 8-15

ON OFF

S5 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 16-23

ON OFF

S6 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 24-31

ON OFF

Table 6-15 describes the different DIP switches.

Table 6-15 Description of the different DIP switches

DIP Switch Description

E1/T1 impedance selection switch Used to select the logical transmission mode of theboard and to notify the software of the currenttransmission mode

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

Page 123: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

DIP Switch Description

E1/T1 TX ground switch Used to control the grounding of the transmitting endof the E1/T1 signals

NOTE

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

l The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switcheson the standby board.

l The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.

6.6.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa BoardThe technical specifications of the EIUa board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of thedimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.

Table 6-16 describes the hardware specifications of the EIUa board.

Table 6-16 Hardware specifications of the EIUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack isresponsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 28.60 W

Weight 1.16 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-17 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-17 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Abis TRX 384

A CIC(64K) 960

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

Page 124: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Ater CIC(16K) 3,840

Pb CIC(16K) 3,840

6.7 FG2a BoardFG2a is short for 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV: a.

The board is optional.The number of the boards to be installed depends on site requirements andthe number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installedand how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document willbe delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the FG2a board can beinstalled in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the FG2a boards can be installedin slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the FG2a boards can be installed in slots24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.7.1 Functions of the FG2a BoardAs an interface board, the FG2a board provides IP over Ethernet.

The FG2a board performs the following functions:

l Provides eight channels over FE ports or two channels over GE portsl Provides the routing-based backup and load sharingl Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layerl Supports the A, Abis, and Gb interfaces

6.7.2 Panel of the FG2a BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2a board.

Figure 6-8 shows the panel of the FG2a board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

Page 125: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-8 Panel of the FG2a board

6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2a BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2aboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-18 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.

Table 6-18 LEDs on the FG2a board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

Page 126: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at theEthernet port)

Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.

Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.

6.7.4 Ports on the FG2a BoardThere are six 10M/100M Ethernet ports, two 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, and two clocksignal output ports on the FG2a board.

Table 6-19 describes the ports on the FG2a board.

Table 6-19 Ports on the FG2a board

Port Function ConnectorType

FE(1) to FE(3) 10M/100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit10/100M signals

RJ45

FE/GE(0) 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used totransmit 10/100/1000M signals

RJ45

2M0 and 2M1 Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB maleconnector

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

Page 127: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a BoardThe technical specifications of the FG2a board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of thedimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.

Table 6-20 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2a board.

Table 6-20 Hardware specifications of the FG2a board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.

Power consumption 38.48 W

Weight 1.36 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-21 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-21 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) 600,000 PPS(Packet Per Second)

Abis TRX 384

A Speech service in the CS domain 6,144 Erlang

Gb Maximum payload throughput(physical layer)

128 Mbit/s

Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ports 23,000

6.8 FG2c BoardFG2c is short for 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c.

The board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and EPS. The number of the boards to beinstalled depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

Page 128: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, seeBSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during themarketing phase. When the MPS or EPS is configured with the SCUa board, the board can beinstalled in slots 14 to 27 in the MPS or EPS. When the MPS or EPS is configured with theSCUb board, the board is preferentially installed in slots 16 to 27. After slots 16 to 27 areoccupied, the board can be installed in slots 14, 15.

6.8.1 Functions of the FG2c BoardAs an interface board, the FG2c board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.

The FG2c board performs the following functions:

l Provides twelve channels over FE ports or eight channels over FE ports and four channelsover GE ports

l Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layerl Provides the routing-based backup and load sharingl Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces

NOTE

l The FG2c board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.

l The FG2c board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management planefunctions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter reporting, as well astransmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions,such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.8.2 Panel of the FG2c BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2c board.

Figure 6-9 shows the panel of the FG2c board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

Page 129: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-9 Panel of the FG2c board

6.8.3 LEDs on the FG2c BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2cboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-22 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.

Table 6-22 LEDs on the FG2c board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

Page 130: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at theEthernet port)

Orange OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.

Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.

6.8.4 Ports on the FG2c BoardThere are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2c board.

Table 6-23 describes the ports on the FG2c board.

Table 6-23 Ports on the FG2c board

Port Function ConnectorType

100BASE-T 100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 100Msignals

RJ45

100/1000BASE-T 100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used totransmit 100/1000M signals

RJ45

6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c BoardThe technical specifications of the FG2c board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

Page 131: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.

Table 6-24 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2c board.

Table 6-24 Hardware specifications of the FG2c board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack isresponsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 85.4 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-25 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-25 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) 2,200,000 PPS(Packet PerSecond)

Abis TRX 2,048

A Speech service in the CS domain 23,040 Erlang

Gb Maximum payload throughput (physicallayer)

1,024 Mbit/s

6.9 FG2d BoardFG2d refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:d.

The FG2d board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, and TCS. The number of theboards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For detailson the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, seeBSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during themarketing phase. For the MPS, the FG2d board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS,the FG2d board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

Page 132: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.9.1 Functions of the FG2d BoardAs an interface board, the FG2d board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.

The FG2d board performs the following functions:

l Provides twelve channels over FE ports or eight channels over FE ports and four channelsover GE ports

l Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layerl Provides the routing-based backup and load sharingl Supports the transmission of data over all its Ethernet ports on the basis of the synchronized

clock signalsl Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces

NOTE

l The FG2d board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.

l The FG2d board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management planefunctions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter, as well as transmissionport management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions, such asestablishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.9.2 Panel of the FG2d BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2d board.

Figure 6-10 shows the panel of the FG2d board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

Page 133: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-10 Panel of the FG2d board

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

Page 134: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.9.3 LEDs on the FG2d BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2d board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2dboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-26 describes the LEDs on the FG2d board.

Table 6-26 LEDs on the FG2d board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at theEthernet port)

Orange OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.

Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.

6.9.4 Ports on the FG2d BoardThere are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2d board.

Table 6-27 describes the ports on the FG2d board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

Page 135: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 6-27 Ports on the FG2d board

Port Function ConnectorType

100BASE-T 100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 100Msignals

RJ45

100/1000BASE-T 100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used totransmit 100/1000M signals

RJ45

6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2d BoardThe technical specifications of the FG2d board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of thedimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.

Table 6-28 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2d board.

Table 6-28 Hardware specifications of the FG2d board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack isresponsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 85.4 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-29 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-29 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) 2,200,000 PPS(Packet PerSecond)

Abis TRX 1,536

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

Page 136: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Session setup/release times 5000/s

A Speech service in the CS domain 23,040 Erlang

Session setup/release times 5000/s

Gb Maximum payload throughput (physicallayer)

512 Mbit/s

Number of UDP(User Datagram Protocol) ports 129000

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an A/Abis-interface board.

6.10 GCUa and GCGa BoardGCUa is short for General Clock Unit REV: a. GCGa is short for General Clock Unit with GPSREV: a.

The GCUa or GCGa board is mandatory. Two boards must be installed on the BSC6900. Theboards must be installed in slots 12 and 13 in the MPS.

6.10.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa BoardThe GCUa/GCGa board performs the clock function.

The GCUa/GCGa board performs the following functions:

l Extracts timing signals from the external synchronization timing port and from thesynchronization line signals, processes the timing signals, and provides the timing signalsand the reference clock for the entire system

l Performs the fast pull-in and holdover functions on the system clock

l Generates RFN signals for the system

l Supports active/standby switchover. The standby GCUa/GCGa board traces the clockphase of the active GCUa/GCGa board. This ensures the smooth output of the clock phasein the case of active/standby switchover.

l Receives and processes the clock signals and the positioning information from the GPScard. (Only the GCGa board supports this function.)

6.10.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.

Figure 6-11 shows the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

Page 137: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-11 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa board

6.10.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa BoardThere are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-30 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 6-30 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The board is functional.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

Page 138: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

6.10.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa BoardThere are 17 ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 6-31 describes the ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 6-31 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa board

Port Function Connector Type

ANT Port for the GPS antenna. This port on the GCGaboard is used to receive the timing signals andpositioning information from the GPS satellite. Thisport is not used on the GCUa board.

SMA maleconnector

CLKOUT0 toCLKOUT9

Ports for providing synchronization clock signals.The ten ports are used to provide 8 kHz clock signalsand 1PPS clock signals.

RJ45

COM0 Serial port, which receives only commissioningdata and discards all other data automatically.

RJ45

COM1 Port for RS422-level 8 kHz clock signals RJ45

TESTOUT Output port for clock signals. The clock signals areused for testing.

SMB maleconnector

TESTIN Input port for testing external clock signals SMB maleconnector

CLKIN0 andCLKIN1

Input port for BITS clock signals and line clocksignals

SMB maleconnector

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

Page 139: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa BoardThe technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board consist of the dimensions, power supply,power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and clock accuracy grade.

Table 6-32 describes the technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 6-32 Technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.

Power consumption GCUa: 20 W; GCGa: 25 W

Weight GCUa: 1.1 kg; GCGa: 1.18 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Clock accuracy grade Grade three

6.11 GOUa BoardGOUa is short for 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV: a.

The GOUa board is optional. The number of the boards to be installed depends on siterequirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boardsthat can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles.This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, theboard can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the GOUa boards can be installedin slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the GOUa boards can be installed in slots24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.11.1 Functions of the GOUa BoardAs an optical interface board, the GOUa board supports IP over Ethernet.

The GOUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides two channels over GE optical ports, which are used for IP transmission

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

Page 140: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharingl Supports the A and Abis interfaces

6.11.2 Panel of the GOUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUa board.

Figure 6-12 shows the panel of the GOUa board.

Figure 6-12 Panel of the GOUa board

6.11.3 LEDs on the GOUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-33 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

Page 141: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 6-33 LEDs on the GOUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

6.11.4 Ports on the GOUa BoardThere are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the GOUa board.

Table 6-34 describes the ports on the GOUa board.

Table 6-34 Ports on the GOUa board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive opticalsignals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

LC/PC

TX

2M0 and2M1

Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male connector

6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa BoardThe technical specifications of the GOUa board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specificationsconsist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.

Table 6-35 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

Page 142: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 6-35 Hardware specifications of the GOUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplaneof the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 37.30 W

Weight 1.20 kg

Operating temperature(long-term)

0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature(short-term)

-5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity(short-term)

5% to 95%

Table 6-36 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-36 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) 600,000 PPS(Packet Per Second)

Abis TRX 384

Session setup/release times 500/s

A Speech service in the CS domain 6,144 Erlang

Session setup/release times 500/s

Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ports 23,000

NOTE

The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Abis/A-interface board.

Table 6-37 describes the specifications of the optical ports.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

Page 143: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 6-37 Specifications of the optical ports

Item Specification

Optical transceiver, GE,Single-Mode

Optical transceiver, GE,Multi-Mode

Mode Single mode Multi-mode

Connector type LC/PC LC/PC

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 850 nm

Operating data rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

Typicaltransmissiondistance

10 km 0.5 km

Max output opticalpower

-3 dBm -2.5 dBm

Min output opticalpower

-9 dBm -9.5 dBm

Saturation opticalpower

-3 dBm 0 dBm

Receiver sensitivity -20 dBm -17 dBm

6.12 GOUc BoardGOUc is short for 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV :c.

The board is optional. The number of the boards to be installed depends on site requirementsand the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can beinstalled and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. Thisdocument will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. When the MPS or EPS isconfigured with the SCUa board, the board can be installed in slots 14 to 27 in the MPS or EPS.When the MPS or EPS is configured with the SCUb board, the board is preferentially installedin slots 16 to 27. After slots 16 to 27 are occupied, the board can be installed in slots 14, 15.

6.12.1 Functions of the GOUc BoardAs an optical interface board, the GOUc board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.

The GOUc board performs the following functions:

l Provides four channels over GE portsl Provides the routing-based backup and load sharingl Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

Page 144: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

NOTE

l The GOUc board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.

l The GOUc board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management planefunctions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter reporting, as well astransmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions,such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.12.2 Panel of the GOUc BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUc board.

Figure 6-13 shows the panel of the GOUc board.

Figure 6-13 Panel of the GOUc board

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

Page 145: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.12.3 LEDs on the GOUc BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),and ACT (optical port LED).

Table 6-38 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.

Table 6-38 LEDs on the GOUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (opticalport LED)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (opticalport LED)

Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.

Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.

6.12.4 Ports on the GOUc BoardThere are four optical ports on the GOUc board.

Table 6-39 describes the ports on the GOUc board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

Page 146: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 6-39 Ports on the GOUc board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive opticalsignals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

LC/PC

TX

6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc BoardThe technical specifications of the GOUc board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specificationsconsist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.

Table 6-40 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUc board.

Table 6-40 Hardware specifications of the GOUc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. Thebackplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 65.90 W

Weight 1.40 kg

Operating temperature(long-term)

0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature(short-term)

-5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity(short-term)

5% to 95%

Table 6-41 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-41 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) 2,200,000 PPS(Packet PerSecond)

Abis TRX 2,048

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

Page 147: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Session setup/release times 3,000/s

A Speech service in the CS domain 23,040 Erlang

Session setup/release times 5,000/s

Gb Maximum payload throughput (physicallayer)

1,024 Mbit/s

Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ports 129,000

NOTE

The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Abis/A-interfaceboard.

Table 6-42 describes the specifications of the optical ports.

Table 6-42 Specifications of the optical ports

Item Specification

Optical transceiver, GE,Single-Mode

Optical transceiver, GE,Multi-Mode

Mode Single mode Multi-mode

Connector type LC/PC LC/PC

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 850 nm

Operating data rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

Typicaltransmissiondistance

10 km 0.5 km

Max output opticalpower

-3 dBm -2.5 dBm

Min output opticalpower

-9 dBm -9.5 dBm

Saturation opticalpower

-3 dBm 0 dBm

Receiver sensitivity -20 dBm -17 dBm

6.13 GOUd BoardGOUd refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:d.

The GOUd board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and EPS. The number of the boardsto be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

Page 148: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, seeBSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during themarketing phase. When the MPS or EPS is configured with the SCUa board, the board can beinstalled in slots 4, 5 and 14 to 27 in the MPS or EPS. When the MPS or EPS is configured withthe SCUb board, the board is preferentially installed in slots 16 to 27. After slots 16 to 27 areoccupied, the board can be installed in slots 4, 5 and 14, 15.

6.13.1 Functions of the GOUd BoardAs an optical interface board, the GOUd board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.

The GOUd board performs the following functions:

l Provides four channels over GE portsl Provides the routing-based backup and load sharingl Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces

NOTE

l The GOUd board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.

l The GOUd board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management planefunctions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter, as well as transmissionport management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions, such asestablishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.13.2 Panel of the GOUd BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUd board.

Figure 6-14 shows the panel of the GOUd board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

Page 149: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-14 Panel of the GOUd board

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

Page 150: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.13.3 LEDs on the GOUd BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the GOUd board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),and ACT (optical port LED).

Table 6-43 describes the LEDs on the GOUd board.

Table 6-43 LEDs on the GOUd board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (opticalport LED)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (opticalport LED)

Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.

Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.

6.13.4 Ports on the GOUd BoardThere are four optical ports on the GOUd board.

Table 6-44 describes the ports on the GOUd board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

Page 151: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 6-44 Ports on the GOUd board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive opticalsignals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

LC/PC

TX

6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUd BoardThe technical specifications of the GOUd board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specificationsconsist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.

Table 6-45 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUd board.

Table 6-45 Hardware specifications of the GOUd board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. Thebackplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 65.90 W

Weight 1.40 kg

Operating temperature(long-term)

0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature(short-term)

-5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity(short-term)

5% to 95%

Table 6-46 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-46 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) 2,200,000 PPS(Packet PerSecond)

Abis TRX 1,535

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

Page 152: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

A Speech service in the CS domain 23,040 Erlang

Gb Maximum payload throughput (physicallayer)

512 Mbit/s

NOTE

The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

Table 6-47 describes the specifications of the optical ports.

Table 6-47 Specifications of the optical ports

Item Specification

Optical transceiver, GE,Single-Mode

Optical transceiver, GE,Multi-Mode

Mode Single mode Multi-mode

Connector type LC/PC LC/PC

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 850 nm

Operating data rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

Typicaltransmissiondistance

10 km 0.5 km

Max output opticalpower

-3 dBm -2.5 dBm

Min output opticalpower

-9 dBm -9.5 dBm

Saturation opticalpower

-3 dBm 0 dBm

Receiver sensitivity -20 dBm -17 dBm

6.14 MDMC BoardMDMC refers to Distribution Monitor and Communication board. It is configured in thecommon power distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with oneMDMC board.

6.14.1 Functions of the MDMC BoardThe MDMC board is used to monitor the common power distribution box.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

Page 153: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

The MDMC board performs the following functions:

l Detects the voltage of two -48 V power inputs

l Detects one output of external temperature sensor

l Detects one output of external humidity sensor

l Detects two lightning protection circuits

l Detects the status of the power switches for six power outputs

l Provides audible and visual alarms

l Communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board, so as to report the working status of the powerdistribution box and exchange operation & maintenance (O&M) information

6.14.2 Panel of the MDMC BoardThere are two LEDs and a mute switch on the panel of the MDMC board.

Figure 6-15 shows the panel of the MDMC board.

Figure 6-15 Panel of the MDMC board

(1) Mute switch

NOTE

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.

l If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it isfaulty.

l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm whenit is faulty.

6.14.3 LEDs on the MDMC BoardThere are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.

Table 6-48 describes the LEDs on the MDMC board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

Page 154: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 6-48 LEDs on the MDMC board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The MDMC board is functional andcommunicates with the SCUa/SCUbboard properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFFfor 0.25s

The MDMC board is not working or itdoes not communicate with the SCUa/SCUb board properly.

OFF The power supply to the MDMC boardis abnormal or the power distributionbox does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.During the self-check of the MDMCboard, however, the ALM LED is alsoON. This indicates that the ALM LEDis functional.

6.14.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC BoardThe MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.

Figure 6-16 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the MDMC board.

Figure 6-16 DIP switch on the MDMC board

With four bits, the DIP switch S4 is used to set the address of the MDMC board.

To set the address, first remove the MDMC board and then set S2 as described in Table 6-49.

Table 6-49 DIP switch on the MDMC board

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significantbit)

ON 0

2 ON 0

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

Page 155: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

3 ON 0

4 (the least significantbit)

ON 0

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the MDMC board must be set as described in Table 6-49.

6.15 OIUa BoardOIUa refers to 1-port channelized Optical STM-1 Interface Unit REV:a.

The OIUa board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, and TCS. The number of theboards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For detailson the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, seeBSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during themarketing phase. For the MPS, the OIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS/TCS, the OIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the OIUa boards can be installedin slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the OIUa boards can be installed in slots24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.15.1 Functions of the OIUa BoardThe OIUa board provides STM-1 transmission over the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces.

The OIUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides one STM-1 port for TDM transmission

l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active andstandby OIUa boards

l Provides one channelized STM-1

l Processes signals according to the LAPD protocol

l Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocol

l Provides the OM links when the TCS is configured on the MSC side

l Supports the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces

6.15.2 Panel of the OIUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the OIUa board.

Figure 6-17 shows the panel of the OIUa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

Page 156: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-17 Panel of the OIUa board

6.15.3 LEDs on the OIUa BoardThere are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 6-50 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board.

Table 6-50 LEDs on the OIUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

Page 157: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receivesignals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signalsproperly.

6.15.4 Ports on the OIUa BoardThere is one optical port, two clock signal output ports 2M0 and 2M1, and one TESTOUT porton the OIUa board.

Table 6-51 describes the ports on the OIUa board.

Table 6-51 Ports on the OIUa board

Port Function Connector Type

Multiplexing E1PortNumber

Multiplexing T1PortNumber

RX Receiving optical port LC 0 to 62 0 to 83

TX Transmitting optical port

2M0 and2M1

Ports for the 2.048 MHz clock signaloutputs, used to transmit the clock signalsobtained from the line clock for systemreference.

SMB maleconnector

- -

TESTOUT

Port for clock signal outputs. The clocksignals are used for testing.

SMB maleconnector

- -

6.15.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa BoardThe technical specifications of the OIUa board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specificationsconsist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.

Table 6-52 describes the hardware specifications of the OIUa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

Page 158: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 6-52 Hardware specifications of the OIUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplaneof the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 20.80 W

Weight 0.94 kg

Operating temperature(long-term)

0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature(short-term)

-5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity(short-term)

5% to 95%

Table 6-53 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-53 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Abis TRX 384

A CIC(64K) 1,920

Ater CIC(16K) 7,168

Pb CIC(16K) 7,168

NOTE

The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board isconfigured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

Table 6-54 describes the specifications of the optical ports.

Table 6-54 Specifications of the optical ports

Item Specification

Optical transceiver, STM-1,Single-Mode

Optical transceiver, STM-1,Multi-Mode

Mode Single mode Multi-mode

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

Page 159: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Optical transceiver, STM-1,Single-Mode

Optical transceiver, STM-1,Multi-Mode

Connector type LC/PC LC/PC

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 1,310 nm

Operating data rate 155 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s

Typicaltransmissiondistance

15km 2 km

Max output opticalpower

-8 dBm -14 dBm

Min output opticalpower

-15 dBm -19 dBm

Saturation opticalpower

-8 dBm -14 dBm

Receiver sensitivity -31 dBm -301 dBm

6.16 OMUa and OMUb BoardOMUa is short for Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. OMUb is short for Operation andMaintenance Unit REV:b.

Two OMUa/OMUb boards must be configured in the BSC6900. One OMUa/OMUb boardoccupies two slots. The board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 inthe MPS at the bottom of the MPR. It is recommended that the OMUa/OMUb board be installedin slots 20 to 23 for inventory sites and in slots 24 to 27 for new sites.

NOTE

l This document describes the installation of other boards based on the OMUa/OMUb boards being installedin slots 24 to 27.

l Different types of OMU boards can be configured in active and standby slots only for a short period. Whenan OMUc board is used to replace an OMUa/OMUb board, the OMUc board and the OMUa/OMUb boardcan be inserted into the slots and co-exist for a short period (less than one hour), so that data can besynchronized from the OMUa/OMUb board to the OMUc board.

l Different types of OMU boards cannot be configured in active and standby slots for a long period. Inscenarios of long-term operation, the active and standby OMU boards must be of the same type. For example,both active and standby OMU boards must be OMUa boards or OMUc boards.

6.16.1 Functions of the OMUa/OMUb BoardThe OMUa/OMUb board connects the LMT/M2000 and the other boards in the BSC6900.

The functions of the OMUa/OMUb board are as follows:

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

Page 160: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

l Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,security management, and loading management functions for the system

l Enables LMT or M2000 users to perform operation and maintenance on the BSC6900system to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUa board ofthe BSC6900

6.16.2 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb BoardThere are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. In addition, thereare hard disks installed on the OMUa/OMUb board.

Figure 6-18 shows the panel of the OMUa/OMUb board.

Figure 6-18 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb board

(1) Captive screw (2) Ejector lever (3) Self-locking latch (4) RUN LED(5) ALM LED (6) ACT LED (7) RESET button (8) SHUTDOWN button(9) USB port (10) ETH0 Ethernet port (11) ETH1 Ethernet port (12) ETH2 Ethernet port

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

Page 161: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

(13) COM port (14) VGA port (15) HD LEDs (16) OFFLINE LED(17) Hard disks (18) Screws for securing the hard disk

NOTE

l To power off the OMUa/OMUb board, simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers awayfrom the front panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. After the OFFLINE LED is on, turn off the powerswitch.

l The SHUTDOWN button is used only for powering off the board in an emergency.

l The RESET button is used to reset the system. It works the same way as the reset button on a PC.

l Pressing the SHUTDOWN or RESET button may scratch the surface of OMUa hard disks. Avoidpressing these two buttons whenever possible.

6.16.3 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, andHD.

Table 6-55 describes the LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board.

Table 6-55 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is being started.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or theboard is disconnected.

OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is being switched over tothe other working mode.

HD Green OFF There is no read or write operationon the hard disk.

Blinking The hard disk is being read orwritten to.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

Page 162: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.16.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb BoardThere are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC, and oneVGA port on the OMUa/OMUb board.

Table 6-56 describes the ports on the OMUa/OMUb board.

Table 6-56 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb board

Port Function Connector Type

USB0-1 and USB2-3 Operators can use the USB portsonly after logging in to theoperating system (OS) running onthe board. The ports does notrequire a signal cable or connectionto other devices when the systemruns properly. Therefore,equipment security is not affected.

USB

ETH0 to ETH1 The hardware ports are used for thecommunication between the OMUand the LMT/M2000.

RJ45

ETH2 The port does not require a signalcable or connection to otherdevices when the system runsproperly. Therefore, equipmentsecurity is not affected.

RJ45

COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC The hardware port needs no cablesfor it does not communicate withother equipment.

DB9

VGA Video port DB15

6.16.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb BoardThis section describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of theOMUa/OMUb board, including dimensions, power supply, number of CPUs, powerconsumption, weight, hard disk capacity, memory capacity, working temperature, and workinghumidity.

Hardware Configuration IndexesTable 6-57 lists the hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa/OMUb board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

Page 163: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 6-57 Hardware configuration indexes

Item Index of the OMUa board Index of the OMUb board

Dimensions 248 mm x 64.6 mm x 395.4mm

248 mm x 64.6 mm x 395.4mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working inactive/standby mode. Thebackplane of the subrack isresponsible for the powersupply.

Two -48 V DC working inactive/standby mode. Thebackplane of the subrack isresponsible for the powersupply.

Number of CPUs 4 2

Power consumption 120 W 90 W

Weight 4.0 kg 3.5 kg

Hard disk capacity 73 GB or above x 2 (RAID 1)*

73 GB or above x 2 (RAID 1)*

Memory capacity 2 G 2 G

Temperature required whenworking for an extendedperiod of time

5°C to 40°C 5°C to 40°C

Temperature required whenworking for a short period oftime

0°C to 50°C 0°C to 50°C

Relative humidity requiredwhen working for anextended period of time

5% to 85% 5% to 85%

Relative humidity requiredwhen working for a shortperiod of time

5% to 95% 5% to 95%

*The hard disk capacity can be 73 GB, 146 GB, or 300 GB. Hard disks will be delivered accordingto the production plan of our hard disk providers.

Performance Counters

Table 6-58 lists the performance counters of the OMUa/OMUb board.

Table 6-58 Performance counters

Counter Index of the OMUa/OMUb Board

Number of recordedalarms

The maximum number of recorded alarms is 150,000.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

Page 164: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Counter Index of the OMUa/OMUb Board

Time when the standbyOMU data issynchronized with theactive OMU data

The standby OMU synchronizes its data with that of the activeOMU board every second.

Duration of thesynchronization betweenthe active OMU files andstandby OMU files

Seven minutes. The time needed for the synchronization variesaccording to the size and quantity of the files to be synchronized.

Duration of theswitchover between theactive and standby OMUs

Refers to the time from the request for OMU switchover beingaccepted to the switchover being finished. The switchoverfinishes in four minutes.

Duration of the OMUrestart

Duration of the OMU restart caused by an OMU fault. Thisduration lasts for about three minutes.

The OMUa/OMUb board contains mechanical hard disk. Adverse environments, such as hightemperature and high altitude, shorten board lifespan.

To extend the lifespan of the OMUa/OMUb board, protect it from vibration, shock, and abnormalshutdowns.

6.17 OMUc BoardOMUc is short for Operation and Maintenance Unit REV: c.

Two boards must be configured in the BSC6900. The boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 to 25 are recommended.

NOTE

l This document describes the installation of other boards on the basis that the OMUc boards are installed inslots 24 and 25.

l Different types of OMU boards can be configured in active and standby slots only for a short period. Whenan OMUc board is used to replace an OMUa/OMUb board, the OMUc board and the OMUa/OMUb boardcan be inserted into the slots and co-exist for a short period (less than one hour), so that data can besynchronized from the OMUa/OMUb board to the OMUc board.

l Different types of OMU boards cannot be configured in active and standby slots for a long period. Inscenarios of long-term operation, the active and standby OMU boards must be of the same type. For example,both active and standby OMU boards must be OMUa boards or OMUc boards.

6.17.1 Functions of the OMUc BoardThe OMUc board works as a bridge for the communication between the Local MaintenanceTerminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.

The OMUc board performs the following functions:

l Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,security management, and loading management functions for the system

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

Page 165: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

l Enables LMT or M2000 users to perform operation and maintenance on the BSC6900system to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUb board ofthe BSC6900

6.17.2 Panel of the OMUc BoardThere are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUc board.

Figure 6-19 shows the panel of the OMUc board.

Figure 6-19 Panel of the OMUc board

(1) Captive screw (2) Ejector lever (3) Self-locking latch (4) RUN LED

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

Page 166: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

(5) ALM LED (6) ACT LED (7) POWER Button (8) HDD LED(9) OFL LED (10) COM port (11) ETH0 Ethernet port (12) ETH1 Ethernet port(13) VGA port (14) USB port (15) ETH2 Ethernet port

NOTE

To power off the OMUc board, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers awayfrom the front panel of the OMUc board. After the OFL (OFFLINE) LED is on, turn off the power switch.

6.17.3 LEDs on the OMUc BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD.

Table 6-59 describes the LEDs on the OMUc board.

Table 6-59 LEDs on the OMUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is being started.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or theboard is disconnected.

OFL Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is being switched over tothe other working mode.

HDD Green OFF There is no read or write operationon the hard disk.

Blinking The hard disk is being read orwritten to.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

Page 167: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.17.4 Ports on the OMUc BoardThere are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0, and one VGA port on theOMUc board.

Table 6-60 describes the ports on the OMUc board.

Table 6-60 Ports on the OMUc board

Port Function Connector Type

USB0-1 and USB2-3 Operators can use the USB portsonly after logging in to theoperating system (OS) running onthe board. The hardware ports needno cables or connecting to otherequipment and thereby do notaffect the equipment safety.

USB

ETH0 to ETH1 The hardware ports are used for thecommunication between the OMUand the LMT/M2000.

RJ45

ETH2 The hardware ports need no cablesor connecting to other equipmentand thereby do not affect theequipment safety.

RJ45

COM The hardware port needs no cablesfor it does not communicate withother equipment.

DB9

VGA Port for the video. DB15

6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUc BoardThe technical specifications of the OMUc board include hardware configuration indexes andperformance counters. The hardware configuration indexes refer to the dimensions, powersupply, number of CPUs, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.

Hardware Configuration Indexes

Table 6-61 lists the hardware configuration indexes of the OMUc board.

Table 6-61 Hardware configuration indexes of the OMUc board

Item Index of the OMUc board

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

Page 168: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Index of the OMUc board

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. Thebackplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Number of CPUs 6

Power consumption 90 W

Weight 2.5 kg

Hard disk capacity 500 GB

Memory capacity 8 GB

Temperature required whenworking for an extendedperiod of time

5°C to 40°C

Temperature required whenworking for a short period oftime

0°C to 50°C

Relative humidity requiredwhen working for anextended period of time

5% to 85%

Relative humidity requiredwhen working for a shortperiod of time

5% to 95%

Performance CountersTable 6-62 describes the performance counters of the OMUc board.

Table 6-62 Performance counters of the OMUc board

Item Index of the OMUc board

Number of recordedalarms

The maximum number of recorded alarms is 150,000.

Time when the standbyOMU data issynchronized with theactive OMU data

The standby OMU synchronizes its data with that of the activeOMU board every second.

Duration of thesynchronization betweenthe active OMU files andstandby OMU files

Seven minutes. The time needed for the synchronization variesaccording to the size and quantity of the files to be synchronized.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

Page 169: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Index of the OMUc board

Duration of theswitchover between theactive and standby OMUs

Refers to the time from the request for OMU switchover beingaccepted to the switchover being finished. The switchoverfinishes in four minutes.

Duration of the OMUrestart

Duration of the OMU restart caused by an OMU fault. Thisduration lasts for about three minutes.

The OMUc board contains a mechanical hard disk. Due to the short lifespan of the mechanicalhard disk, the lifespan of the OMUc board is about 5 years. Adverse environments, such as hightemperature and high altitude, shorten board lifespan.

To ensure the lifespan of the OMUc board, the OMUc board must be protected against vibration,shock and abnormal shutdown.

6.18 PAMU BoardPAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the powerdistribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMUboard.

6.18.1 Functions of the PAMU BoardThe PAMU board is used to monitor the power distribution box at the top of the BSC6900cabinet.

The PAMU board performs the following functions:

l Detects the voltage of six -48 V power inputs and reports related alarmsl Detects the status of the power switches for 20 power outputs and reports related alarmsl Enables the switchover when faults occur in the serial port communication, and

communicates with the SCUa/SCUb boardl Provides two RS485 and two RS232 asynchronous serial ports

6.18.2 Panel of the PAMU BoardOn the panel of the PAMU board, there are two LEDs and a mute switch.

Figure 6-20 shows the panel of the PAMU board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

Page 170: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-20 Panel of the PAMU board

(1) RUN LED (2) ALM LED (3) Mute switch

NOTE

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.

l If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it isfaulty.

l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm whenit is faulty.

6.18.3 LEDs on the PAMU BoardThere are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.

Table 6-63 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.

Table 6-63 LEDs on the PAMU board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The PAMU board is functional andcommunicates with the SCUa/SCUbboard properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFFfor 0.25s

The PAMU board is faulty or it does notcommunicate with the SCUa/SCUbboard properly.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

Page 171: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

OFF The power supply to the PAMU boardis abnormal or the power distributionbox does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.During the self-check of the PAMUboard, however, the ALM LED is alsoON. This indicates that the ALM LEDis functional.

6.18.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU BoardThe PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

Figure 6-21 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.

Figure 6-21 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.

To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table6-64.

Table 6-64 DIP switch on the PAMU board

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significantbit)

ON 0

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the least significantbit)

ON 0

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

Page 172: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 6-64.

6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU BoardThe technical specifications of the PAMU board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, and weight.

Table 6-65 describes the technical specifications of the PAMU board.

Table 6-65 Technical specifications of the PAMU board

Item Specification

Dimensions 340 mm × 72 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode

Power consumption 15 W

Weight 0.2 kg

6.19 PEUa BoardPEUa is short for 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV: a.

The PEUa board is optional.The number of the boards to be installed depends on siterequirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boardsthat can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles.This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, theboard can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the PEUa boards can be installedin slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the PEUa boards can be installed in slots24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.19.1 Functions of the PEUa BoardAs an interface board, the PEUa board supports E1/T1 transmission.

The PEUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides 32 channels of IP over PPP/MLPPP over E1/T1l Provides 128 PPP links or 32 MLPPP groups, each MLPPP group containing 8 MLPPP

linksl Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby PEUa

boardsl Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 channels of E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission

rate is 2.048 Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

Page 173: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

l Supports the Abis and Gb , and A interfaces

6.19.2 Panel of the PEUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the PEUa board.

Figure 6-22 shows the panel of the PEUa board.

Figure 6-22 Panel of the PEUa board

6.19.3 LEDs on the PEUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-66 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.

Table 6-66 LEDs on the PEUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

Page 174: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

6.19.4 Ports on the PEUa BoardThere are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the PEUa board.

Table 6-67 describes the ports on the PEUa board.

Table 6-67 Ports on the PEUa board

Port Function ConnectorType

E1/T1 (0-7) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1signals on channels 0-7

DB44

E1/T1 (8-15) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1signals on channels 8-15

DB44

E1/T1 (16-23) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1signals on channels 16-23

DB44

E1/T1 (24-31) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1signals on channels 24-31

DB44

2M0 and 2M1 Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB maleconnector

6.19.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa BoardThe PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Figure 6-23 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

Page 175: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-23 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

Page 176: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottomplate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.

l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 6-23, there are twosquare holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Throughthe two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-board, and therefore you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 6-23 is toturn inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4,S6, or S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bitsof S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.

l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency betweenthe physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting bycommand as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SETE1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support forbalanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you mustalso manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalancedmode.

l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxialcable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signalsare transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted paircable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the groundingof 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 6-68 describes the DIPswitches on the PEUa board.

Table 6-68 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch

Meaning

S2 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31

ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode

OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23

ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode

OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7

ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

Page 177: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch

Meaning

OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes

S8 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15

ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode

OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting theworking mode,consisting of two bits

(ON, ON) Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode

(OFF, ON) Setting theworking mode toE1 balancedmode

(ON, OFF) Setting theworking mode toT1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting theworking mode toJ1 mode

6.19.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa BoardThe technical specifications of the PEUa board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of thedimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.

Table 6-69 describes the hardware specifications of the PEUa board.

Table 6-69 Hardware specifications of the PEUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

Page 178: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Power consumption 27.53 W

Weight 1.30 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-70 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-70 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Abis TRX 384

Gb Maximum payloadthroughput (physical layer)

64 Mbit/s

A CIC (64K) 6144

6.20 PFCU BoardPFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Eachfan box is configured with one PFCU board.

6.20.1 Functions of the PFCU BoardThe PFCU board is used to monitor the fan box.

The PFCU board performs the following functions:

l Monitors the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through theLED

l Communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board, to report the working status of the fan boxl Collects temperature information and detects the temperature through temperature sensorsl Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fan

speedl Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED

6.20.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU BoardThe PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIPswitch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

Page 179: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU boardis configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)

Figure 6-24 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 6-24 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described inTable 6-71. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After setting the DIPswitch, the address of the PFCU board is 1.

Table 6-71 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch

Description

SW1 1 (the least significantbit)

OFF 1

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the most significantbit)

ON 0

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)

Figure 6-25 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 6-25 DIP switch on the PFCU board

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

Page 180: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described inTable 6-72. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, theaddress of the PFCU board is 4.

Table 6-72 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch

Description

SW1 1 (the least significantbit)

ON 0

2 ON 0

3 OFF 1

4 (the most significantbit)

ON 0

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

6.20.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU BoardThe technical specifications of the PFCU board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,frequency of PWM signals, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speedadjustment.

Table 6-73 describes the technical specifications of the PFCU board.

Table 6-73 Technical specifications of the PFCU board

Item Specification

Dimensions 270 mm x 35 mm

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC

Frequency of PWM signals 1 kHz

Detectable temperature range -5°C to +55°C(basic requirement)

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55%to 100% of the full speed.

6.21 POUc BoardPOUc refers to 4-port TDM/IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c.

The POUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, or TCS. The number of theboards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For detailson the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

Page 181: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during themarketing phase. When the MPS/EPS/TCS is configured with the SCUa board. For the MPS/EPS/TCS, the POUc board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 23. When the MPS/EPS/TCS is configured with the SCUb board, the POUc board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the POUc boards can be installedin slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the POUc boards can be installed in slots24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.21.1 Functions of the POUc BoardAs an interface board, the POUc board supports TDM/IP over channelized STM-1/OC-3transmission.

The POUc board performs the following functions:

l Provides four channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on TDM/IPprotocol

l Supports the PPP functionl Extracts line clock signalsl Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and

standby POUc boardsl Supports the A, Abis, Gb, Ater, and Pb interfaces

NOTEThe POUc board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. These two CPUs perform different functions when theports on the POUc board use different transmission modes.

l When the ports on the POUc board use IP transmission, CPU0 mainly performs the management planefunctions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter, as well as transmissionport management and maintenance, and CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions, such asestablishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

l When the ports on the POUc board use TDM transmission, CPU0 mainly performs the managementplane and control plane functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter,transmission port management and maintenance, as well as establishment and clearing of channels fordata flows, and CPU1 mainly processes the signaling according to the MTP2 and Ater SL protocols.

6.21.2 Panel of the POUc BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUc board.

Figure 6-26 shows the panel of the POUc board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

Page 182: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-26 Panel of the POUc board

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

Page 183: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.21.3 LEDs on the POUc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 6-74 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.

Table 6-74 LEDs on the POUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receivesignals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signalsproperly.

6.21.4 Ports on the POUc BoardThere are four optical ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-75 describes the ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-75 Ports on the POUc board

PortNumber

Port Function ConnectorType

MultiplexingE1 PortNumber

MultiplexingT1 PortNumber

0 RX Receivingoptical port

LC/PC 0 to 62 0 to 83

TX Transmittingoptical port

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

Page 184: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

PortNumber

Port Function ConnectorType

MultiplexingE1 PortNumber

MultiplexingT1 PortNumber

1 RX Receivingoptical port

LC/PC 63 to 125 84 to 167

TX Transmittingoptical port

2 RX Receivingoptical port

LC/PC 126 to 188 168 to 251

TX Transmittingoptical port

3 RX Receivingoptical port

LC/PC 189 to 251 252 to 335

TX Transmittingoptical port

6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc BoardThe technical specifications of the POUc board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specificationsconsist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.

Table 6-76 describes the hardware specifications of the POUc board.

Table 6-76 Hardware specifications of the POUc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.

Power consumption 77.25 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Temperature required when working for along time

0°C to 45°C

Temperature required when working for ashort time

-5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity required when workingfor a long time

5% to 85%

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

Page 185: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Relative humidity required when workingfor a short time

5% to 95%

Table 6-77 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDMtransmission mode.

Table 6-77 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDM transmissionmode

Item Specification withthe DPUc BoardConfigured

Specification withthe DPUf BoardConfigured

Abis TRX 512 512

A CIC (64K) 3906 7680

Ater CIC (16K) 7168 7168

Pb CIC (16K) 7168 7168

Gb Maximum payloadthroughput (physical layer)

504 Mbit/s 504 Mbit/s

NOTE

When the A interface is carried by the POUc board, the POUc board supports a maximum of 3906 CICs if theDPUf and DPUc boards are configured in the same subrack where the POUc board is installed.When the A interface is carried by the POUc board, the POUc board supports a maximum of 7680 CICs if thefollowing conditions are met:l At least four DPUf boards are configured in the same subrack where the POUc board is installed.l The POUc board and at least four DPUf boards are managed by the same main control XPUa/XPUb board.The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board isconfigured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

Table 6-78 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IPtransmission mode.

Table 6-78 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IP transmissionmode

Item Specification

Abis TRX 2048

A Speech service in the CS domain 23,040 Erlang

Ater CIC (16K) 23,040 (The TC subrack supportsonly 13,000 CICs.)

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

Page 186: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 6-79 describes the specifications of the optical ports.

Table 6-79 Specifications of the optical ports

Item Specification

Optical transceiver, STM-1,Single-Mode

Optical transceiver, STM-1,Multi-Mode

Mode Single mode Multi-mode

Connector type LC/PC LC/PC

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 1,310 nm

Operating data rate 155 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s

Typicaltransmissiondistance

15km 2 km

Max output opticalpower

-8 dBm -14 dBm

Min output opticalpower

-15 dBm -19 dBm

Saturation opticalpower

-8 dBm -14 dBm

Receiver sensitivity -31 dBm -301 dBm

6.22 SCUa BoardSCUa is short for GE Switching network and Control Unit REV: a.

The SCUa board is mandatory. Two boards must be installed in the subrack. The boards mustbe installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.

6.22.1 Functions of the SCUa BoardThe SCUa board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for thesubrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented andthe internal switching in turn enables complete connection between modules of the BSC6900.

The SCUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides the maintenance management functionl Provides configuration and maintenance of a subrack or of the entire BSC6900l Monitors the power supply, fans, and environment of the cabinetl Supports the port trunking functionl Supports the active/standby switchoverl Enables inter-subrack connections

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

Page 187: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

l Provides a total switching capacity of 60 Gbit/sl Distributes clock signals and RFN signals for the BSC6900

6.22.2 Panel of the SCUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUa board.

Figure 6-27 shows the panel of the SCUa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

Page 188: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-27 Panel of the SCUa board

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

Page 189: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.22.3 LEDs on the SCUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-80 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.

Table 6-80 LEDs on the SCUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at theEthernet port)

Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.

Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.

6.22.4 Ports on the SCUa BoardThere are twelve 10/100/1000BASE-T ports, one COM port, one CLKIN port, and oneTESTOUT port on the SCUa board.

Table 6-81 describes the ports on the SCUa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

Page 190: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 6-81 Ports on the SCUa board

Port Function ConnectorType

10/100/1000BASE-T0to10/100/1000BASE-T9

10 M/100 M/1000 M Ethernet ports, used for the inter-subrack connection.

RJ45

10/100/1000BASE-T10 and10/100/1000BASE-T11

10 M/100 M/1000 M Ethernet ports, the two ports are notused in the BSC6900.

RJ45

COM The port does not require a signal cable or connection toother devices when the system runs properly. Therefore,equipment security is not affected.

RJ45

CLKIN Port for reference clock signal inputs, used to receive the 8kHz clock signals from the GCUa board.

RJ45

TESTOUT Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used fortesting.

SMB maleconnector

6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa BoardThe technical specifications of the SCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.

Table 6-82 describes the technical specifications of the SCUa board.

Table 6-82 Technical specifications of the SCUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.

Power consumption 54.5 W

Weight 1.2 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

Page 191: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Switching capacity 60 Gbit/s

Figure 6-28 shows the switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured withtwo SCUa boards.

Figure 6-28 Switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with two SCUaboards

NOTE

If only one SCUa board is functioning in the subrack, the switching bandwidth of each slot reduces by half.

6.23 SCUb BoardSCUb is short for GE Switching network and Control Unit REV: b.

The SCUb board is mandatory. Two boards must be installed in the subrack. The boards mustbe installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.

NOTE

SCUa and SCUb boards cannot be simultaneously installed in slot 6 and slot 7 of the same subrack.SCUa and SCUb boards can be simultaneously installed in two subracks of the same or different cabinets. Forexample, two SCUa boards are installed in subrack 0, and two SCUb boards are installed in subrack 1.The SFP+ high-speed cable has two length specifications: 3 m (9.84 ft.) and 10 m (32.80 ft.). The SCUb boardsinside the same cabinet are connected using the SFP+ high-speed cable. When the cabling distance between twosubracks in different cabinets is longer than 10 m (32.80 ft.), the SCUb boards in the two subracks need to beconnected using a multi-mode optical cable.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

Page 192: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

6.23.1 Functions of the SCUb BoardThe SCUb board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for thesubrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented andthe internal switching in turn enables complete connection between all modules of theBSC6900.

The SCUb board performs the following functions:

l Provides the maintenance management functionl Provides configuration and maintenance of a subrack or of the entire BSC6900l Monitors the power supply, fans, and environment of the cabinetl Supports the port trunking functionl Supports the active/standby switchoverl Enables inter-subrack connectionsl Provides a total switching capacity of 240 Gbit/sl Distributes clock signals and RFN signals for the BSC6900

6.23.2 Panel of the SCUb BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUb board.

Figure 6-29 shows the panel of the SCUb board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

Page 193: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-29 Panel of the SCUb board

6.23.3 LEDs on the SCUb BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUbboard, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10GLINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.

Table 6-83 describes the LEDs on the SCUb board.

Table 6-83 LEDs on the SCUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

Page 194: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at theEthernet port)

Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.

Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.

10G LINK Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

6.23.4 Ports on the SCUb BoardThere are 15 ports on the SCUb board.

Table 6-84 describes the ports on the SCUb board.

Table 6-84 Ports on the SCUb board

Label Function Connector

10/100/1000BASE-T0to10/100/1000BASE-T5

10 M/100 M/1000 M Ethernet ports, used for the inter-subrack connection.

RJ45

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

Page 195: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Label Function Connector

10/100/1000BASE-T6and10/100/1000BASE-T7

10 M/100 M/1000 M Ethernet ports, the two ports are notused in the BSC6900.

RJ45

10G-T8 to10G-T11

10 Gbit/s Ethernet ports, used for the inter-subrackconnection.l These ports can be interconnected using SFP+ High-

Speed cables.l These ports can be interconnected using multi-mode

optical cables.

l When theseports areinterconnected usingSFP+ High-Speedcables, theSFP+connectorsare used.

l When theseports areinterconnected usingmulti-modeopticalcables, theLC or PCconnectorsare used.

COM The port does not require a signal cable or connection toother devices when the system runs properly. Therefore,equipment security is not affected.

RJ45

CLKIN Port for reference clock signal inputs, used to receive the 8kHz clock signals from the GCUa board.

RJ45

TESTOUT Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used fortesting.

SMB maleconnector

6.23.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUb BoardThe technical specifications of the SCUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capability.

Table 6-85 describes the technical specifications of the SCUb board.

Table 6-85 Technical specifications of the SCUb board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

Page 196: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Input Power Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.

Power consumption 78 W

Weight 1.5 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Switching capacity 240 Gbit/s

Figure 6-30 shows the switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured withtwo SCUb boards.

Figure 6-30 Switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with two SCUbboards

NOTE

If only one SCUb board is functioning in the subrack, the switching bandwidth of each slot reduces by half.

The switching bandwidth of a slot does not change when the SCUb boards are interconnected using SFP+ high-speed cables or optical cables.

Table 6-86 describes the technical specifications of the optical ports.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

Page 197: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 6-86 Specifications of the optical ports

Item Optical Transceiver, 10GE, Multi-Mode

Mode Multi mode

Connector type LC/PC

Center wavelength 850 nm

Operating data rate 10.3125 Gbit/s

Typical transmission distance 0.3 km

Max output optical power -1 dBm

Min output optical power -7.3 dBm

Saturation optical power -1 dBm

Receiver sensitivity -11.1 dBm

6.24 TNUa BoardTNUa refers to TDM switching Network Unit REV:a. The TNUa board is optional. In aBSC6900 using the Abis over IP and A over IP mode, the TNUa boards do not need to beconfigured. In a BSC6900 using other modes, install two TNUa boards in slots 4 and 5 of theMPS, EPS, and TCS.

6.24.1 Functions of the TNUa BoardThe TNUa board provides the TDM switching and serves as the switching center for the CSservices of the entire system.

The TNUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides 128K x 128K time slots TDM switchingl Allocates the TDM network resources

6.24.2 Panel of the TNUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the TNUa board.

Figure 6-31 shows the panel of the TNUa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

Page 198: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-31 Panel of the TNUa board

6.24.3 LEDs on the TNUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-87 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board.

Table 6-87 LEDs on the TNUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply,but the board is faulty.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

Page 199: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no powersupply, or the board isfaulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

6.24.4 Ports on the TNUa BoardThere are six TDM ports on the TNUa board.

Table 6-88 describes the ports on the TNUa board.

Table 6-88 Ports on the TNUa board

Port Function Connector Type

TDM0 to TDM5 TDM high-speed serial ports,used to connect the TNUaboards in different subracks

DB14

NOTE

The BSC6900 supports the inter-TNUa connections between the MPS and the EPS. It also supports theinter-TNUa connections between the TCSs.

6.24.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa BoardThe technical specifications of the TNUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity and processing capability.

Table 6-89 describes the technical specifications of the TNUa board.

Table 6-89 Technical specifications of the TNUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack isresponsible for the power supply.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

Page 200: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Power consumption 31.20 W

Weight 1.00 kg

Temperature required when working for along time

0°C to 45°C

Temperature required when working for ashort time

-5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity required when workingfor a long time

5% to 85%

Relative humidity required when workingfor a short time

5% to 95%

Processing capability One TNUa board provides 4K LVDS switchingcapability for each slot in the subrack.When two TNUa boards are installed in thesubrack, the switching capacity remains 4kLVDS per slot.

6.25 XPUa BoardXPUa refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:a. The XPUa board is optional. Two to tenXPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installedin slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23, slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUa boards can beinstalled in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installedin slots 26 to 27 of the MPS.

l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed in slots26 to 27 of the MPS.

l The XPUa board cannot be configured in slot 24 or slot 25 of MPS.

6.25.1 Functions of the XPUa BoardLoaded with different software, the XPUa board is functionally divided into main control XPUaboard and non-main control XPUa board. The main control XPUa board is used to manage theGSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the systemand process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUa board is usedto process the GSM services on the control plane.

NOTE

Run the ADD BRD command to configure the logic function type of an XPUa board:

l If Logical function type is set to RGCP, the XPUa board serves as a main control XPUa board.

l If Logical function type is set to GCP, the XPUa board serves as a non-main control XPUa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

Page 201: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Main Control XPUa BoardThe main control XPUa board has four logical subsystems.

Subsystem 0 of the main control XPUa board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used tomanage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of thesystem. The functions are described as follows:

l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resourcesbetween subracks

l Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the loadinformation on the control planes between subracks

l Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSI-RNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query

l Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user planeresources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900

Subsystems 1 to 3 of the main control XPUa board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), whichis used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfacesl Processing transport layer signalingl Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and

establishing signaling and service connectionsl Processing RFN signaling

Non-Main Control XPUa BoardThe non-main control XPUa board has four logical subsystems.

The four subsystems of the non-main control XPUa board belong to the CPUS, which is usedto process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfacesl Processing transport layer signalingl Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and

establishing signaling and service connectionsl Processing RFN signaling

6.25.2 Panel of the XPUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUa board.

Figure 6-32 shows the panel of the XPUa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

Page 202: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-32 Panel of the XPUa board

6.25.3 LEDs on the XPUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-90 describes the LEDs on the XPUa board.

Table 6-90 LEDs on the XPUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

Page 203: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at theEthernet port)

Green OFF There is no data transmission overthe Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over theEthernet port.

6.25.4 Ports on the XPUa BoardThere are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUa board.

Table 6-91 describes the ports on the XPUa board.

Table 6-91 Ports on the XPUa board

Port Function Connector Type

10/100/1000BASE-T0 to10/100/1000BASE-T3

10M/100M/1000M Ethernetports

RJ45

6.25.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa BoardThe technical specifications of the XPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.

Table 6-92 describes the technical specifications of the XPUa board.

Table 6-92 Technical specifications of the XPUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

Page 204: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Power consumption 75.4 W

Weight 1.6 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability of the main controlXPUa board

Supporting 270 TRXs, 270 cells, 270 BTSs, and492,000 Max equivalent BHCAs (Busy HourCall Attempts)

Processing capability of the non-maincontrol XPUa board

Supporting 360 TRXs, 360 cells, 360 BTSs, and656,000 Max equivalent BHCAs

NOTE

The preceding values are calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. In practice, the values can becalculated on the basis of the actual traffic model.

6.26 XPUb BoardXPUb refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:b. The XPUb board is optional. Two to tenXPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the XPUb boards canbe installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23, slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUbboards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUb boards can be installedin slots 26 to 27 of the MPS.

l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUb boards can be installed in slots26 to 27 of the MPS.

l The XPUb board cannot be configured in slot 24 or slot 25 of MPS.

6.26.1 Functions of the XPUb BoardLoaded with different software, the XPUb board is functionally divided into main control XPUbboard and non-main control XPUb board. The main control XPUb board is used to manage theGSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the systemand process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUb board is usedto process the GSM services on the control plane.

NOTE

Run the ADD BRD command to configure the logic function type of an XPUb board:

l If Logical function type is set to RGCP, the XPUb board serves as a main control XPUb board.

l If Logical function type is set to GCP, the XPUb board serves as a non-main control XPUb board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

Page 205: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Main Control XPUb BoardThe main control XPUb board has eight logical subsystems.

Subsystem 0 of the main control XPUb board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used tomanage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of thesystem. The functions are described as follows:

l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resourcesbetween subracks

l Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the loadinformation on the control planes between subracks

l Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSI-RNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query

l Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user planeresources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900

Subsystems 1 to 7 of the main control XPUb board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), whichis used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfacesl Processing transport layer signalingl Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and

establishing signaling and service connectionsl Processing RFN signaling

Non-Main Control XPUb BoardThe non-main control XPUb board has eight logical subsystems.

The eight subsystems of the non-main control XPUb board belong to the CPUS, which is usedto process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfacesl Processing transport layer signalingl Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and

establishing signaling and service connectionsl Processing RFN signaling

6.26.2 Panel of the XPUb BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUb board.

Figure 6-33 shows the panel of the XPUb board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

Page 206: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 6-33 Panel of the XPUb board

6.26.3 LEDs on the XPUb BoardAmong all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUbboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-93 describes the LEDs on the XPUb board.

Table 6-93 LEDs on the XPUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

Page 207: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at theEthernet port)

Orange OFF There is no data transmission overthe Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over theEthernet port.

6.26.4 Ports on the XPUb BoardThere are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUb board.

Table 6-94 describes the ports on the XPUb board.

Table 6-94 Ports on the XPUb board

Port Function Connector Type

10/100/1000BASE-T0 to10/100/1000BASE-T3

10M/100M/1000M Ethernetports

RJ45

6.26.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb BoardThe technical specifications of the XPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.

Table 6-95 describes the technical specifications of the XPUb board.

Table 6-95 Technical specifications of the XPUb board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

Page 208: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Item Specification

Power consumption 52.3 W

Weight 1.2 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability of the main controlXPUb board

Supporting 640 TRXs, 640 cells, 640 BTSs, and1,050,000 Max equivalent BHCAs (Busy HourCall Attempts)

Processing capability of the non-maincontrol XPUb board

Supporting 640 TRXs, 640 cells, 640 BTSs, and1,050,000 Max equivalent BHCAs

NOTE

The preceding values are calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. In practice, the values can becalculated on the basis of the actual traffic model.

6.27 WOPB BoardWOPB refers to Overvoltage Protection Board. It is configured in the common powerdistribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one WOPB board.

6.27.1 Functions of the WOPB BoardThe WOPB board provides the power surge protection function.

The WOPB board performs the following functions:

l Suppresses differential mode power surgel Suppresses common mode power surge

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

Page 209: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

7 Cables

About This Chapter

This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.

7.1 Power CablesThe power cables are mandatory and are of two categories: external power cables and internalpower cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.

7.2 PGND CablesThe PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable forthe power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fansubrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.

7.3 Optical CableThe optical cable is used to connect the optical interface board to the Optical Distribution Frame(ODF) or other NEs, or to interconnect SCUa boards. It is optional in the BSC6900 and thenumber of optical cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.

7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner (Fiber Coupler)The optical splitter/combiner is optional in the BSC6900. A maximum of 48 optical splitters/combiners can be installed in a subrack to combine two inputs of optical signals into one or splitone input into two.

7.5 75-ohm Coaxial CableThe 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxialcables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standbyEIUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunksignals.

7.6 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial CableThe active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number ofactive/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cableconnects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1signals.

7.7 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

Page 210: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohmtwisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects theactive/standby EIUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.

7.8 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair CableThe active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. Thenumber of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cableconnects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/T1 signals.

7.9 Inter-TNUa CableThe inter-TNUa cable is a type of signal cable. It is used to connect the TNUa boards that arelocated in different subracks. It is optional. The number of inter-TNUa cables to be installeddepends on the site requirements.

7.10 BITS Clock CableThe BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clockcables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signalsto the GCUa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the BITS clocksignal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock conversioncables.

7.11 Y-Shaped Clock CableThe Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of Y-shapedclock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHzclock signals from the GCUa or GCGa board in the MPS to the SCUa or SCUb board in theEPS.

7.12 Line Clock Signal CableThe line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed totransmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to theGCUa board.

7.13 Straight-Through CableThe straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshieldedstraight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boardsin different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/OMUc/FG2c board to other devices or the XPUa/XPUb board to the CBC. The number ofstraight-through cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.

7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan SubrackThe monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to theservice subracks.

7.15 Alarm Box Signal CableThe alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. Youcan choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send thealarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.

7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution BoxThe monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals fromthe power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.

7.17 GPS Signal Transmission CableThe GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals tothe GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.

7.18 OMU serial cable

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

Page 211: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

The OMU serial cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.

7.19 EMU RS485 Communication CableThe EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 andthe EMU.

7.20 SFP+ High-Speed CableThe SFP+ high-speed cable connects the SCUb boards in different subracks.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

Page 212: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

7.1 Power CablesThe power cables are mandatory and are of two categories: external power cables and internalpower cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.

The external power cables connect the Power Distribution Frame (PDF) to the power distributionbox at the top of the cabinet. The external power cables need to be installed on site. The internalpower cables connect the power distribution box to the modules inside the cabinet. The internalpower cables are installed before the cabinet is delivered.

Cabinet Configured with High-Power Power Distribution Box

Table 7-1 describes the external power cables when the BSC6900 is configured with the high-power power distribution box. Table 7-2 and Table 7-3 describe the internal power cables whenthe BSC6900 is configured with the high-power power distribution box.

Table 7-1 External power cables

Name Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

ConnectorType 1/InstallationPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

External -48 Vpowercable

Blue 25/35 2-hole JGterminal/-48 VDC input port onthe powerdistribution box

OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the PDF

Four per cabinet

External RTNpowercable

Black 25/35 2-hole JGterminal/-48 VDC input port onthe powerdistribution box

OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the PDF

Four per cabinet

Table 7-2 Internal power cables (1)

Name Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

ConnectorType 1/InstallationPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

Internal-48 VDCpowercable

Blue 10 OTterminal/-48 VDC input porton the powerdistributionbox

OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the subrack

Two per subrack

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

Page 213: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Name Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

ConnectorType 1/InstallationPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

InternalRTNpowercable

Black 10 OTterminal/-48 VDC input porton the powerdistributionbox

OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the subrack

Two per subrack

Table 7-3 Internal power cables (2)

Name Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

ConnectorType 1/InstallationPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

Internal-48 VDCpowercable

Blue 2 OTterminal/-48 VDC input porton the powerdistributionbox

D-typeconnector/Power inputport on theindependentfan subrack

Two per independentfan subrack

InternalRTNpowercable

Black 2 OTterminal/-48 VDC input porton the powerdistributionbox

D-typeconnector/Power inputport on theindependentfan subrack

Two per independentfan subrack

Figure 7-1 shows the external power cable.

Figure 7-1 External power cable

(1) OT terminal (2) 2-hole JG terminal

Figure 7-2 shows the internal power cable for subracks.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

Page 214: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-2 Internal power cable for subracks

Figure 7-3 shows the internal power cable for the independent fan subrack.

Figure 7-3 Internal power cable for the independent fan subrack

Cabinet Configured with Common Power Distribution BoxTable 7-4 describes the external power cables when the BSC6900 is configured with thecommon power distribution box. Table 7-5 describes the internal power cables when theBSC6900 is configured with the common power distribution box.

Table 7-4 External power cables

Name Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

ConnectorType 1/InstallationPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

External -48 Vpowercable

Blue 25/35 Cord endterminal/-48 VDC input port onthe powerdistribution box

OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the PDF

Four per cabinet

External RTNpowercable

Black 25/35 Cord endterminal/-48 VDC input port onthe powerdistribution box

OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the PDF

Four per cabinet

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

Page 215: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 7-5 Internal power cables

Name Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

ConnectorType 1/InstallationPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

Internal-48 VDCpowercable

Blue 8 Cord endterminal/-48 VDC input porton the powerdistributionbox

OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the subrack

Two per subrack

InternalRTNpowercable

Black 8 Cord endterminal/-48 VDC input porton the powerdistributionbox

OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the subrack

Two per subrack

The internal power cable and the external power cable have the same appearance when theBSC6900 is configured with the common power distribution box. Figure 7-4 shows the external/internal power cable.

Figure 7-4 External/Internal power cable

X1: Cord end terminal X2: OT terminal

7.2 PGND CablesThe PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable forthe power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fansubrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.

Each cabinet must be configured with one external PGND cable. When the cabinets arecombined, three inter-cabinet PGND cables must be installed between every two adjacentcabinets. Other PGND cables are already installed in the cabinet before delivery.

Table 7-6 describes the PGND cables.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

Page 216: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 7-6 PGND cables

CableName

Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

Connector Type1/InstallationPosition1

ConnectorType 2/InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

ExternalPGNDcable

Green andyellow

25/35 OTterminal/Grounding bolt atthe toprear ofeachcabinet

OT terminal/PGND outputport on the PDF

One percabinet

Inter-cabinetPGNDcable

Green andyellow

6 OTterminal/PGNDbusbar ofeachcabinet

OT terminal/PGND busbar ofeach cabinet

Threebetweenevery twoadjacentcabinets

PGNDcable forthe powerdistribution box

Green andyellow

6 OTterminal/PGNDbusbar ofeachcabinet

OT terminal/Portfor PGND cableon the powerdistribution box

One perpowerdistributionbox

PGNDcable forthe subrack

Green andyellow

6 OTterminal/PGNDbusbar ofeachcabinet

OT terminal/Portfor the PGNDcable on thesubrack

Two persubrack

PGNDcable forthe cabinetdoor

Green andyellow

6 OTterminal/Grounding bolt onthe base

OT terminal/Grounding bolton the cabinetdoor

Eight percabinet

PGNDcable fortheindependent fansubrack

Green andyellow

6 OTterminal/PGNDbusbar ofeachcabinet

OT terminal/Grounding pointof theindependent fansubrack

One perindependentfan subrack

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

Page 217: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

The PGND cable for the independent fan subrack is different from the other PGND cables forthe BSC6900. Figure 7-5 shows the PGND cable for the independent fan subrack. Figure 7-6shows the other PGND cables.

Figure 7-5 PGND cable for the independent fan subrack

Figure 7-6 Other PGND cables

7.3 Optical CableThe optical cable is used to connect the optical interface board to the Optical Distribution Frame(ODF) or other NEs, or to interconnect SCUa boards. It is optional in the BSC6900 and thenumber of optical cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.

Classification of the Optical CableAccording to the types of optical connectors at both ends of the cable, the optical cable can beclassified into the following types:l LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cablel LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cablel LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable

NOTE

l In actual installation, the LC/PC optical connector at one end of the cable is connected to the opticalinterface board in the BSC6900, and the connector type at the other end of the cable depends on siterequirements.

l The SFP+ high-speed cable has two length specifications: 3 m (9.84 ft.) and 10 m (32.80 ft.). The SCUbboards inside the same cabinet are connected using the SFP+ high-speed cable. When the cablingdistance between two subracks in different cabinets is longer than 10 m (32.80 ft.), the SCUb boardsin the two subracks need to be connected using a multi-mode optical cable.

l The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable connects the optical interface board to theODF or other NEs, or interconnects the optical interface boards.

l In practice, two optical cables form a pair. Both ends of each cable in the pair are attached withtemporary labels. If one end of the cable is connected to the TX port, the other end should be connectedto the RX port.

CAUTIONThe TX end and RX end of each optical cable must be connected correctly. Otherwise, the opticalsignals cannot be received or transmitted.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

Page 218: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

AppearanceTable 7-7 shows the optical cables used in the BSC6900.

Table 7-7 BSC6900 optical cables

Optical CableType

Appearance

LC/PC-LC/PCsingle-mode/multi-modeoptical cable

LC/PC-FC/PCsingle-mode/multi-modeoptical cable

LC/PC-SC/PCsingle-mode/multi-modeoptical cable

InstallationThe optical cable has an LC/PC connector at one end connected to the optical interface boardin the BSC6900. The other end of the optical cable can use an LC/PC connector, SC/PCconnector, or FC/PC connector as required. Figure 7-7 shows the installation positions of theoptical cable.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

Page 219: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-7 Installation positions of the optical cable

7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner (Fiber Coupler)The optical splitter/combiner is optional in the BSC6900. A maximum of 48 optical splitters/combiners can be installed in a subrack to combine two inputs of optical signals into one or splitone input into two.

FunctionThe optical splitter/combiner splits or combines optical signals.

Figure 7-8 shows the operating principle of an optical combiner.

Figure 7-8 Operating principle of an optical combiner

Figure 7-9 shows the operating principle of an optical splitter.

Figure 7-9 Operating principle of an optical splitter

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

Page 220: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

CAUTIONThe TX end and RX end of each optical splitter/combiner must be correctly connected.Otherwise, optical signals cannot be received or transmitted.

AppearanceFigure 7-10 shows the optical splitter/combiner.

Figure 7-10 Optical splitter/combiner

ClassificationThe optical splitter/combiner can be classified into the following types according to the modein which optical signals are transmitted:

l Single-mode optical splitter/combiner: The optical fiber of the single-mode optical splitter/combinter is yellow.

l Multi-mode optical splitter/combiner: The optical fiber of the multi-mode optical splitter/combiner is orange.

Application ScenarioWhen optical interface boards work in active/standby mode and optical transmission deviceswork in independent mode, optical splitters/combiners can be used to improve the redundancyperformance of optical interface boards.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

Page 221: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

CAUTIONOnly the POUc board can be connected to an optical splitter/combiner.

The optical splitter/combiner cannot be used to solve any of the following problems:

l The active and standby optical ports on BSC6900 interface boards are operational. When thetransmission on the TX optical fiber for the active optical port is interrupted, the BSC6900reports a Multiplex Section (MS) Remote Defect Indication (RDI) alarm on the active andstandby optical ports. An automatic switchover, however, is not triggered between the activeand standby optical ports.

l The active and standby optical ports on BSC6900 interface boards are operational. Thetransmission is interrupted on the optical fiber between the optical splitter/combiner and theTX port on the peer equipment, and the BSC6900 reports a MS RDI alarm on the active andstandby optical ports. An automatic switchover, however, is not triggered between the activeand standby optical ports.

l The active and standby optical ports on BSC6900 interface boards are operational. Thetransmission is interrupted on the optical fiber between the optical splitter/combiner and theRX port on the peer equipment, and the BSC6900 reports a Loss of Signal (LOS) alarm onthe active and standby optical ports. An automatic switchover, however, is not triggeredbetween the active and standby optical ports.

Installation

Figure 7-11 shows the installation positions of optical splitters/combiners.

Figure 7-11 Installation positions of optical splitters/combiners

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

Page 222: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

7.5 75-ohm Coaxial CableThe 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxialcables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standbyEIUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunksignals.

The 75-ohm coaxial cable used in the BSC6900 has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the 75-ohm coaxialcable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All of the16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.

AppearanceFigure 7-12 shows the 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Figure 7-12 75-ohm coaxial cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of thecable)

(3) Label (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector

The 75-ohm coaxial cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add a connectorto the other end according to the actual requirements.

Pin AssignmentThe outer shield layer of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the metalcase of the DB44 connector. Table 7-8 describes the pin assignment of the DB44 connectorsfor the micro coaxial cables of the 75-ohm coaxial cable.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

Page 223: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 7-8 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables

Pin ofDB44Connector

W1 Remarks Pin ofDB44Connector

W2 Remarks

Signal MicroCoaxial CableIdentifier

Signal MicroCoaxial CableIdentifier

38 Ring 1 R1 15 Ring 1 T1

23 Tip 30 Tip

37 Ring 2 R2 14 Ring 2 T2

22 Tip 29 Tip

36 Ring 3 R3 13 Ring 3 T3

21 Tip 28 Tip

35 Ring 4 R4 12 Ring 4 T4

20 Tip 27 Tip

34 Ring 5 R5 11 Ring 5 T5

19 Tip 26 Tip

33 Ring 6 R6 10 Ring 6 T6

18 Tip 25 Tip

32 Ring 7 R7 9 Ring 7 T7

17 Tip 24 Tip

31 Ring 8 R8 8 Ring 8 T8

16 Tip 7 Tip

Table 7-9 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-8.

Table 7-9 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable

Signal Bearer

Ring shield layer of micro coaxial cables

Tip Core of micro coaxial cables

InstallationOne end of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the EIUa/PEUaboard. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

Page 224: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

7.6 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial CableThe active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number ofactive/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cableconnects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1signals.

AppearanceThe active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the active/standby 75-ohmcoaxial cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. Allof the 16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.

Figure 7-13 shows the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Figure 7-13 Active/Standby 75-ohm coaxial cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Metal case of the DB44 connector

(3) Label 1 (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of thecable)

(5) Label 2 (identifying a coaxial cable)

The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You needto add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Table 7-10 and Table 7-12 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

Page 225: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 7-10 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4

X1 W3 Remarks

X1 W4 Remarks

Pin ofDB44Connector

Signal MicroCoaxialCableIdentifier

Pin ofDB44Connector

Signal MicroCoaxialCableIdentifier

38 Ring 1 R1 15 Ring 1 T1

23 Tip 30 Tip

37 Ring 2 R2 14 Ring 2 T2

22 Tip 29 Tip

36 Ring 3 R3 13 Ring 3 T3

21 Tip 28 Tip

35 Ring 4 R4 12 Ring 4 T4

20 Tip 27 Tip

34 Ring 5 R5 11 Ring 5 T5

19 Tip 26 Tip

33 Ring 6 R6 10 Ring 6 T6

18 Tip 25 Tip

32 Ring 7 R7 9 Ring 7 T7

17 Tip 24 Tip

31 Ring 8 R8 8 Ring 8 T8

16 Tip 7 Tip

NOTE

In Table 7-10, T1 indicates the first-route E1 TX signal, and R1 indicates the first-route E1 RX signal.Similarly, RN indicates the Nth-route E1 RX signal, and TN indicates the Nth-route E1 TX signal.

Table 7-11 describes the signals of the micro coaxial cables listed in Table 7-10.

Table 7-11 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable

Signal Bearer

Ring shield layer of coaxial cables

Tip Core of coaxial cables

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

Page 226: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2

W2 W1

Pin of X1Connector

Pin of X2Connector

Remarks Pin of X1Connector

Pin of X2Connector

Remarks

38 38 PAIR 15 15 PAIR

23 23 30 30

37 37 PAIR 14 14 PAIR

22 22 29 29

36 36 PAIR 13 13 PAIR

21 21 28 28

35 35 PAIR 12 12 PAIR

20 20 27 27

34 34 PAIR 11 11 PAIR

19 19 26 26

33 33 PAIR 10 10 PAIR

18 18 25 25

32 32 PAIR 9 9 PAIR

17 17 24 24

31 31 PAIR 8 8 PAIR

16 16 7 7

NOTE

In Table 7-12, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shield layer ofthe twisted pair cable.

InstallationThe two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable are connectedto the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxialcable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another NE throughtransmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable can also beconnected to another NE directly.

Figure 7-14 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

Page 227: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-14 Installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables

7.7 120-ohm Twisted Pair CableThe 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohmtwisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects theactive/standby EIUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.

Appearance

Figure 7-15 shows the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Figure 7-15 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer ofthe cable)

(3) Label (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add aconnector to the other end according to the actual requirements.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

Page 228: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Pin AssignmentThe outer shield layer of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the BSC6900 by themetal case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-13 describes the pin assignment of the DB44connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Table 7-13 Pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable

Pin ofDB44Connector

W1 Color Pin ofDB44Connector

W2 Color

Signal 120-OhmTwistedPairCableIdentifier

Signal 120-OhmTwistedPairCableIdentifier

38 Ring/R- R1 Blue 15 Ring/T- T1 Blue

23 Tip/R+ White 30 Tip/T+ White

37 Ring/R- R2 Orange 14 Ring/T- T2 Orange

22 Tip/R+ White 29 Tip/T+ White

36 Ring/R- R3 Green 13 Ring/T- T3 Green

21 Tip/R+ White 28 Tip/T+ White

35 Ring/R- R4 Brown 12 Ring/T- T4 Brown

20 Tip/R+ White 27 Tip/T+ White

34 Ring/R- R5 Grey 11 Ring/T- T5 Grey

19 Tip/R+ White 26 Tip/T+ White

33 Ring/R- R6 Blue 10 Ring/T- T6 Blue

18 Tip/R+ Red 25 Tip/T+ Red

32 Ring/R- R7 Orange 9 Ring/T- T7 Orange

17 Tip/R+ Red 24 Tip/T+ Red

31 Ring/R- R8 Green 8 Ring/T- T8 Green

16 Tip/R+ Red 7 Tip/T+ Red

Table 7-14 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-13.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

Page 229: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 7-14 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable

Signal Bearer

Ring/R- One core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1signals

Tip/R+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1signals

Ring/T- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1signals

Tip/T+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals

InstallationOne end of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the EIUa/PEUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.

7.8 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair CableThe active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. Thenumber of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cableconnects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/T1 signals.

AppearanceFigure 7-16 shows the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Figure 7-16 Active/Standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Metal case of the DB44 connector

(3) Label 1 (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturerof the cable)

(5) Label 2 (identifying a twisted pair cable)

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

Page 230: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. Youneed to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Table 7-15 and Table 7-17 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4

X1 W3 Color X1 W4 Color

Pin ofDB44Connector

Signal Twisted PairCableIdentifier

Pin ofDB44Connector

Signal Twisted PairCableIdentifier

38 Ring/R- R1 Blue 15 Ring/R- T1 Blue

23 Tip/R+ White 30 Tip/R+ White

37 Ring/R- R2 Orange 14 Ring/R- T2 Orange

22 Tip/R+ White 29 Tip/R+ White

36 Ring/R- R3 Green 13 Ring/R- T3 Green

21 Tip/R+ White 28 Tip/R+ White

35 Ring/R- R4 Brown 12 Ring/R- T4 Brown

20 Tip/R+ White 27 Tip/R+ White

34 Ring/T- R5 Grey 11 Ring/T- T5 Grey

19 Tip/T+ White 26 Tip/T+ White

33 Ring/T- R6 Blue 10 Ring/T- T6 Blue

18 Tip/T+ Red 25 Tip/T+ Red

32 Ring/T- R7 Orange 9 Ring/T- T7 Orange

17 Tip/T+ Red 24 Tip/T+ Red

31 Ring/T- R8 Green 8 Ring/T- T8 Green

16 Tip/T+ Red 7 Tip/T+ Red

NOTE

In Table 7-15, R- and R+ stand for reception signals; T- and T+ stand for transmission signals.

Table 7-16 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-15.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

Page 231: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 7-16 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable

Signal Bearer

Ring/R- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signalsto the BSC6900

Tip/R+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1signals to the BSC6900

Ring/T- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signalsfrom the BSC6900

Tip/T+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1signals from the BSC6900

Table 7-17 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2

Twisted Pair Cable W2 Remarks Twisted Pair Cable W1 Remarks

Pin of X1Connector

Pin of X2Connector

Pin of X1Connector

Pin of X2Connector

38 38 PAIR 15 15 PAIR

23 23 30 30

37 37 PAIR 14 14 PAIR

22 22 29 29

36 36 PAIR 13 13 PAIR

21 21 28 28

35 35 PAIR 12 12 PAIR

20 20 27 27

34 34 PAIR 11 11 PAIR

19 19 26 26

33 33 PAIR 10 10 PAIR

18 18 25 25

32 32 PAIR 9 9 PAIR

17 17 24 24

31 31 PAIR 8 8 PAIR

16 16 7 7

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

Page 232: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

NOTE

In Table 7-17, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shield layer ofthe twisted pair cable.

InstallationThe two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable areconnected to the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to anotherNE through transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted paircable can also be connected to another NE directly.

Figure 7-17 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables.

Figure 7-17 Installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables

7.9 Inter-TNUa CableThe inter-TNUa cable is a type of signal cable. It is used to connect the TNUa boards that arelocated in different subracks. It is optional. The number of inter-TNUa cables to be installeddepends on the site requirements.

AppearanceFigure 7-18 shows the inter-TNUa cable.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

Page 233: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-18 Inter-TNUa cable

(1) DB14 (2) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables)(3) Main label (identifying the code, version, andmanufacturer of the cable)

InstallationThe two DB14 connectors at one end of the inter-TNUa cable are connected to the active andstandby TNUa boards in one subrack. The two DB14 connectors at the other end of the inter-TNUa cable are connected to the active and standby TNUa boards in another subrack.

Figure 7-19 shows the installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

Page 234: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-19 Installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables

7.10 BITS Clock CableThe BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clockcables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signalsto the GCUa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the BITS clocksignal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock conversioncables.

AppearanceFigure 7-20 shows the 75-ohm coaxial clock cable.

Figure 7-20 75-ohm coaxial clock cable

(1) SMB connector (2) Label

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

Page 235: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-21 shows the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.

Figure 7-21 120-ohm clock conversion cable

(1) SMB connector 2Label

NOTE

The 120-ohm clock conversion cable has two SMB connectors at one end. Only one SMB connector isused, and the other SMB connector is bound to the wire bushing by using cable ties. Pay attention to theconnection when using the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.

InstallationOne end of the BITS clock signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on theGCUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the BITS clock source.

Figure 7-22 shows the installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables.

Figure 7-22 Installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

Page 236: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

7.11 Y-Shaped Clock CableThe Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of Y-shapedclock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHzclock signals from the GCUa or GCGa board in the MPS to the SCUa or SCUb board in theEPS.

NOTE

The Y-shaped clock cable is not required if the BSC6900 is configured with only one MPS and no EPS.

AppearanceFigure 7-23 shows the Y-shaped clock cable.

Figure 7-23 Y-shaped clock cable

(1) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables) (2) RJ45 connector

InstallationThe RJ45 connector at one end of the Y-shaped clock cable is connected to the SCUa or SCUbboard in the EPS. The two RJ45 connectors at the other end of the cable are connected to theactive and standby GCUa or GCGa boards in the MPS.

Figure 7-24 shows the installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

Page 237: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-24 Installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables

7.12 Line Clock Signal CableThe line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed totransmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to theGCUa board.

NOTE

When the interface board providing line clock signals is located in the MPS, the line clock signals are sentto the GCUa board through the backplane of the subrack. In this case, the line clock signal cable is notrequired.

Appearance

Figure 7-25 shows the line clock signal cable.

Figure 7-25 Line clock signal cable

(1) SMB connector

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

Page 238: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

InstallationOne end of the line clock signal cable is connected to the 2M0 or the 2M1 port on the interfaceboard. The other end of the signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on theGCUa board.

7.13 Straight-Through CableThe straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshieldedstraight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boardsin different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/OMUc/FG2c board to other devices or the XPUa/XPUb board to the CBC. The number ofstraight-through cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.

AppearanceFigure 7-26 shows the shielded straight-through cable.

Figure 7-26 Shielded straight-through cable

NOTE

X1 and X2 are shielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-through cable.

Figure 7-27 shows the unshielded straight-through cable.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

Page 239: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-27 Unshielded straight-through cable

NOTE

X1 and X2 are unshielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the unshielded straight-through cable.

Pin AssignmentTable 7-18 describes the pins in the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded straight-through cable.

Table 7-18 Pins of the straight-through cable

X1 End Wire Color X2 End Wire Color

X1-1 White and orange X2-1 White and orange

X1-2 Orange X2-2 Orange

X1-3 White and green X2-3 White and green

X1-4 Blue X2-4 Blue

X1-5 White and blue X2-5 White and blue

X1-6 Green X2-6 Green

X1-7 White and brown X2-7 White and brown

X1-8 Brown X2-8 Brown

Installationl When the unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards in different

subracks, the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the cable are connected to the SCUa boardsthat are located in different subracks, as shown in Figure 7-28.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

Page 240: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-28 Installation positions of the unshielded straight-through cables between theSCUa boards in different subracks

l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the OMUa/OMUc board to

other devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to ETH0 or ETH1on the OMUa/OMUc board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable isconnected to the Ethernet port on the other devices.

l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d boardto other devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernetport on the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cableis connected to the Ethernet port on the other devices.

l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the XPUa/XPUb board to theCBC, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port on theXPUa/XPUb board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected toan Ethernet port on the CBC.

7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent FanSubrack

The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to theservice subracks.

AppearanceFigure 7-29 shows the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

Page 241: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-29 Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack

The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack has a DB9 connector at one endand a DB15 connector at the other end.

Table 7-19 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Table 7-19 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack

Start End Description Remarks

X1.1 X2.7 Tx+ Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.6 Tx-

X1.3 X2.3 Rx+ Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.2 Rx-

X1.5 X2.5 GND -

X1.SHELL X2.SHELL - X1.SHELL isconnected toX2.SHELL throughthe shield layer.

Table 7-20 describes the signals listed in Table 7-19.

Table 7-20 Signals

Signal Signal Description

Tx+ Positive phase signal transmitted

Tx- Negative phase signal transmitted

Rx+ Positive phase signal received

Rx- Negative phase signal received

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

Page 242: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Installation

The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrackis connected to the MONITOR 0 port on the independent fan subrack. The DB9 connector atthe other end of the cable is connected to the Monitor port on the bottom subrack.

NOTE

When a cabinet is configured with multiple subracks, you should configure the subracks from bottom totop. Therefore, the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is always connected to thebottom subrack in the cabinet.

7.15 Alarm Box Signal CableThe alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. Youcan choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send thealarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.

Appearance

The connectors of the alarm box signal cable are of two types: DB9 and DB25. The actual typemust be consistent with that in the Site Survey Report. The following takes an alarm box signalcable with the DB9 connector as an example.

Figure 7-30 shows an alarm box signal cable.

Figure 7-30 Alarm box signal cable

Pin Assignment

Table 7-21 describes the pins of the alarm box signal cable.

Table 7-21 Pins of the alarm box signal cable

RJ45 DB9

3 5

5 2

6 3

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

Page 243: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Installation

The RJ45 connector at one end of the alarm box signal cable is connected to the input serial porton the alarm box. The DB9/DB25 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to theserial port on the LMT.

Figure 7-31 shows the connection of the alarm box signal cable.

Figure 7-31 Connection of the alarm box signal cable

7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power DistributionBox

The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals fromthe power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.

Appearance

Figure 7-32 shows the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

Figure 7-32 Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box has a DB9 connector at one end anda DB15 connector at the other end.

Table 7-22 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

Page 244: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 7-22 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

Start End Description Remarks

X1.1 X2.3 Tx+ Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Tx-

X1.3 X2.7 Rx+ Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.6 Rx-

X1.5 X2.5 RTN -

X1.SHELL X2.SHELL - X1.SHELL isconnected toX2.SHELL throughthe shield layer.

Table 7-23 describes the signals listed in Table 7-22.

Table 7-23 Signals

Signal Signal Description

Tx+ Positive phase signal transmitted

Tx- Negative phase signal transmitted

Rx+ Positive phase signal received

Rx- Negative phase signal received

InstallationThe DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box isconnected to the corresponding port on the power distribution box. The DB9 connector at theother end of the cable is connected to the MONITOR 1 port on the independent fan subrack.

Figure 7-33 shows the installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the powerdistribution box.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

Page 245: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-33 Installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

7.17 GPS Signal Transmission CableThe GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals tothe GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.

AppearanceFigure 7-34 shows the GPS signal transmission cable.

Figure 7-34 GPS signal transmission cable

X1: SMA male connector X2: N-type female connector X3: N-type male connector

InstallationConnect the N-type female connector of a 1-meter-long cable to the N-type male connector ofa 2.5-meter-long cable to join the two cables into a 3.5-meter-long GPS signal transmissioncable. The SMA male connector at one end of the GPS signal transmission cable is connected

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

232

Page 246: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

to port ANT on the panel of the GCGa board. The N-type female connector at the other end ofthe cable is connected to port Protect on the surge protector at the cabinet top.

7.18 OMU serial cableThe OMU serial cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.

Appearance

Figure 7-35 shows the OMU serial cable.

Figure 7-35 OMU serial cable

Pin Assignment

Both ends of the OMU serial cable should use DB9 female connectors. Table 7-24 lists the pinsof the OMU serial cable.

Table 7-24 Pins of the OMU serial cable

DB9 DB9

2 3

3 2

5 5

Installation Position

One end of the OMU serial cable is connected to the COM serial port on the OMU. The otherend of the OMU serial cable is connected to the serial port on the local maintenance terminal.

NOTEThe OMU serial port cable is used for commissioning purpose only. It is not involved in routine installation.

7.19 EMU RS485 Communication CableThe EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 andthe EMU.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

Page 247: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

AppearanceFigure 7-36 shows the RS485 communication cable.

Figure 7-36 RS485 communication cable

Pin AssignmentTable 7-25 describes the pins of the RS485 communication cable.

Table 7-25 Pins of the RS485 communication cable

RJ45 DB9

4 2

1 3

5 6

2 7

InstallationThe DB9 male connector at one end of the RS485 communication cable is connected to the DB9female connector on the environment monitoring device. The RJ45 connector at the other endof the cable is connected to the J2 port on a high-capacity power distribution box or the COM1port on a common power distribution box.

NOTE

One environment monitoring device is delivered with one RS485 signal cable (10 m) and one RS232 signalcable (2 m). Choose one signal cable based on the actual requirements. The RS485 signal cable isrecommended. Use the Ethernet cable as a substitute if the length of the delivered signal cable is notsufficient.

7.20 SFP+ High-Speed CableThe SFP+ high-speed cable connects the SCUb boards in different subracks.

AppearanceFigure 7-37 shows the SFP+ high-speed cable.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

Page 248: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 7-37 SFP+ high-speed cable

InstallationBoth ends of the SFP+ high-speed cable are connected to the 10G Ethernet ports on the SCUbboards in different subracks.

Length of the SFP+ High-Speed CableThe SFP+ high-speed cable has two length specifications: 3 m (9.84 ft.) and 10 m (32.80 ft.).

The SCUb boards inside the same cabinet are connected using the SFP+ high-speed cable. Whenthe cabling distance between two subracks in different cabinets is longer than 10 m (32.80 ft.),the SCUb boards in the two subracks need to be connected using a multi-mode optical cable.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

Page 249: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

8 LEDs on the Boards

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.

8.1 LEDs on the DPUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.2 LEDs on the DPUc BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.3 LEDs on the DPUd BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.4 LEDs on the DPUf BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.5 LEDs on the DPUg BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUg board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.6 LEDs on the EIUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.7 LEDs on the FG2a BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2aboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

8.8 LEDs on the FG2c BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2cboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

8.9 LEDs on the FG2d BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2d board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2dboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

8.10 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa BoardThere are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

Page 250: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

8.11 LEDs on the GOUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.12 LEDs on the GOUc BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),and ACT (optical port LED).

8.13 LEDs on the GOUd BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the GOUd board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),and ACT (optical port LED).

8.14 LEDs on the MDMC BoardThere are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.

8.15 LEDs on the OIUa BoardThere are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

8.16 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, andHD.

8.17 LEDs on the OMUc BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD.

8.18 LEDs on the PAMU BoardThere are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.

8.19 LEDs on the PEUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.20 LEDs on the POUc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

8.21 LEDs on the SCUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

8.22 LEDs on the SCUb BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUbboard, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10GLINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.

8.23 LEDs on the TNUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.24 LEDs on the XPUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

8.25 LEDs on the XPUb BoardAmong all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUbboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

Page 251: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

8.1 LEDs on the DPUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-1 describes the LEDs on the DPUa board.

Table 8-1 LEDs on the DPUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it isabnormal.

8.2 LEDs on the DPUc BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-2 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board.

Table 8-2 LEDs on the DPUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

Page 252: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software orit is abnormal.

8.3 LEDs on the DPUd BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-3 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board.

Table 8-3 LEDs on the DPUd board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or itis abnormal.

8.4 LEDs on the DPUf BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUf board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

Page 253: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 8-4 LEDs on the DPUf board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it isabnormal.

8.5 LEDs on the DPUg BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUg board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-5 describes the LEDs on the DPUg board.

Table 8-5 LEDs on the DPUg board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or itis abnormal.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

Page 254: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

8.6 LEDs on the EIUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-6 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board.

Table 8-6 LEDs on the EIUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

8.7 LEDs on the FG2a BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2aboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-7 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.

Table 8-7 LEDs on the FG2a board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241

Page 255: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at theEthernet port)

Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.

Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.

8.8 LEDs on the FG2c BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2cboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-8 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.

Table 8-8 LEDs on the FG2c board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

242

Page 256: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at theEthernet port)

Orange OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.

Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.

8.9 LEDs on the FG2d BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2d board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2dboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-9 describes the LEDs on the FG2d board.

Table 8-9 LEDs on the FG2d board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at theEthernet port)

Orange OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

Page 257: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.

8.10 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa BoardThere are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-10 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 8-10 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

8.11 LEDs on the GOUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-11 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.

Table 8-11 LEDs on the GOUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

Page 258: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

8.12 LEDs on the GOUc BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),and ACT (optical port LED).

Table 8-12 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.

Table 8-12 LEDs on the GOUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (opticalport LED)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

Page 259: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

ACT (opticalport LED)

Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.

Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.

8.13 LEDs on the GOUd BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the GOUd board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),and ACT (optical port LED).

Table 8-13 describes the LEDs on the GOUd board.

Table 8-13 LEDs on the GOUd board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (opticalport LED)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (opticalport LED)

Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.

Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

Page 260: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

8.14 LEDs on the MDMC BoardThere are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.

Table 8-14 describes the LEDs on the MDMC board.

Table 8-14 LEDs on the MDMC board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The MDMC board is functional andcommunicates with the SCUa/SCUbboard properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFFfor 0.25s

The MDMC board is not working or itdoes not communicate with the SCUa/SCUb board properly.

OFF The power supply to the MDMC boardis abnormal or the power distributionbox does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.During the self-check of the MDMCboard, however, the ALM LED is alsoON. This indicates that the ALM LEDis functional.

8.15 LEDs on the OIUa BoardThere are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 8-15 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board.

Table 8-15 LEDs on the OIUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

247

Page 261: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receivesignals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signalsproperly.

8.16 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, andHD.

Table 8-16 describes the LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board.

Table 8-16 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is being started.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or theboard is disconnected.

OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is being switched over tothe other working mode.

HD Green OFF There is no read or write operationon the hard disk.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

248

Page 262: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

Blinking The hard disk is being read orwritten to.

8.17 LEDs on the OMUc BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD.

Table 8-17 describes the LEDs on the OMUc board.

Table 8-17 LEDs on the OMUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is being started.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or theboard is disconnected.

OFL Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is being switched over tothe other working mode.

HDD Green OFF There is no read or write operationon the hard disk.

Blinking The hard disk is being read orwritten to.

8.18 LEDs on the PAMU BoardThere are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.

Table 8-18 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

249

Page 263: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 8-18 LEDs on the PAMU board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s

The PAMU board is functional andcommunicates with the SCUa/SCUbboard properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFFfor 0.25s

The PAMU board is faulty or it does notcommunicate with the SCUa/SCUbboard properly.

OFF The power supply to the PAMU boardis abnormal or the power distributionbox does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.During the self-check of the PAMUboard, however, the ALM LED is alsoON. This indicates that the ALM LEDis functional.

8.19 LEDs on the PEUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-19 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.

Table 8-19 LEDs on the PEUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

250

Page 264: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

8.20 LEDs on the POUc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 8-20 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.

Table 8-20 LEDs on the POUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receivesignals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signalsproperly.

8.21 LEDs on the SCUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-21 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.

Table 8-21 LEDs on the SCUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

251

Page 265: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at theEthernet port)

Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.

Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.

8.22 LEDs on the SCUb BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUbboard, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10GLINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.

Table 8-22 describes the LEDs on the SCUb board.

Table 8-22 LEDs on the SCUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

252

Page 266: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

LED Color Status Description

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at theEthernet port)

Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.

Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.

10G LINK Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

8.23 LEDs on the TNUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-23 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board.

Table 8-23 LEDs on the TNUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loadingstate.

ON There is power supply,but the board is faulty.

OFF There is no powersupply, or the board isfaulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

253

Page 267: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

8.24 LEDs on the XPUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-24 describes the LEDs on the XPUa board.

Table 8-24 LEDs on the XPUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at theEthernet port)

Green OFF There is no data transmission overthe Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over theEthernet port.

8.25 LEDs on the XPUb BoardAmong all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUbboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-25 describes the LEDs on the XPUb board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

254

Page 268: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 8-25 LEDs on the XPUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at theEthernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at theEthernet port)

Orange OFF There is no data transmission overthe Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over theEthernet port.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

255

Page 269: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

9 DIP Switches on Components

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

9.1 DIP Switch on the SubrackThe DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa BoardThe EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.

9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC BoardThe MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.

9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU BoardThe PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa BoardThe PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU BoardThe PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIPswitch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in afan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU boardis configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

256

Page 270: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

9.1 DIP Switch on the SubrackThe DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Location of the DIP SwitchThe DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of theDIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.

AppearanceFigure 9-1 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.

Figure 9-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack

Description about the DIP SwitchThe DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. Thehigher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 9-1 describes the bits.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

257

Page 271: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 9-1 Description about the bits

Bit Description

1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is theleast significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bitis set to OFF, it indicates 1.

6 Odd parity check bit

7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON

8 (the most significantbit)

Startup type of the subrack, the default value is OFF.NOTEl For the inventory sites upgrading from BSC6000 to BSC6900, keep

the former settings.

l For the new sites in BSC6900, the bit is conservative and is fixed toOFF.

CAUTIONl You must set the DIP switch before powering on the subrack. The setting after the power-

on is invalid.

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting

As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an oddnumber. The method for setting the bits is as follows:

1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.

2. Set bit 7 to ON.

3. Set bit 8 to OFF.

4. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch.

l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.

l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.

Table 9-2 describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.

Table 9-2 Setting of the DIP switch

SubrackNo.

Bit Setting of theDIP Switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

258

Page 272: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

SubrackNo.

Bit Setting of theDIP Switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF

4 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

ON ON OFF

ON ON OFF ON OFF

5 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

OFF ON OFF

ON ON ON ON OFF

9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa BoardThe EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.

Figure 9-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

259

Page 273: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

NOTE

l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In thiscase, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON.

l When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode.In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF.

l All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced toand combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Table 9-3 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board.

Table 9-3 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm CoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

S1 8 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s 0-7

ON OFF

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

260

Page 274: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm CoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

7 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s 8-15

ON OFF

6 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s16-23

ON OFF

5 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s24-31

ON OFF

1-4 Reserved - -

S3 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 0-7

ON OFF

S4 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 8-15

ON OFF

S5 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 16-23

ON OFF

S6 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 24-31

ON OFF

Table 9-4 describes the different DIP switches.

Table 9-4 Description of the different DIP switches

DIP Switch Description

E1/T1 impedance selection switch Used to select the logical transmission mode of theboard and to notify the software of the currenttransmission mode

E1/T1 TX ground switch Used to control the grounding of the transmitting endof the E1/T1 signals

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

261

Page 275: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

NOTE

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

l The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switcheson the standby board.

l The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.

9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC BoardThe MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.

Figure 9-3 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the MDMC board.

Figure 9-3 DIP switch on the MDMC board

With four bits, the DIP switch S4 is used to set the address of the MDMC board.

To set the address, first remove the MDMC board and then set S2 as described in Table 9-5.

Table 9-5 DIP switch on the MDMC board

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significantbit)

ON 0

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the least significantbit)

ON 0

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the MDMC board must be set as described in Table 9-5.

9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU BoardThe PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

Figure 9-4 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

262

Page 276: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.

To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table9-6.

Table 9-6 DIP switch on the PAMU board

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significantbit)

ON 0

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the least significantbit)

ON 0

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 9-6.

9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa BoardThe PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Figure 9-5 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

263

Page 277: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 9-5 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

264

Page 278: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottomplate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.

l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 9-5, there are twosquare holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Throughthe two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-board, and therefore you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 9-5 is to turninwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, orS8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits ofS10 to OFF, turn them inwards.

l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency betweenthe physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting bycommand as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SETE1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support forbalanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you mustalso manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalancedmode.

l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxialcable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signalsare transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted paircable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the groundingof 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 9-7 describes the DIPswitches on the PEUa board.

Table 9-7 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch

Meaning

S2 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31

ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode

OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23

ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode

OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7

ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

265

Page 279: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch

Meaning

OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes

S8 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15

ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode

OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting theworking mode,consisting of two bits

(ON, ON) Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode

(OFF, ON) Setting theworking mode toE1 balancedmode

(ON, OFF) Setting theworking mode toT1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting theworking mode toJ1 mode

9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU BoardThe PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIPswitch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in afan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU boardis configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)Figure 9-6 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

266

Page 280: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described inTable 9-8. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After setting the DIPswitch, the address of the PFCU board is 1.

Table 9-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch

Description

SW1 1 (the least significantbit)

OFF 1

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the most significantbit)

ON 0

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)Figure 9-7 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described inTable 9-9. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, theaddress of the PFCU board is 4.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

267

Page 281: BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description(V900R013C00_09)(PDF)-En

Table 9-9 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch

Description

SW1 1 (the least significantbit)

ON 0

2 ON 0

3 OFF 1

4 (the most significantbit)

ON 0

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

268